Home

VersaPro Programming Software User`s Guide, GFK

1. Active Cell Ladder Toolbar Shows active Provides quick access to location for inserting frequently used LD additional logic functions S V ersaPro chan 4AIN_ bik gh File Edit View alal bale k ata Off 19 t3_CH4 All Function Gre Bit Operations Booleans A0D_DINT ADD_INT ADD REAL STOOOZO Controls DIY DINT Conversion Di INT Function Counters DIY REAL Toolbars Comment Rung Example of a MOD Expanded View comment rung _ Math MUL DINT Displays all configured for brief Na mnnnnnnasasn Numerical WUL INT instruction display mode below check the CRS Eor each channel to zet iE the Relational WUL R EAL groups and z5 il Special SCALE_INT functions that Timer SCALE WORE can be used in SUB_DINT the LD Editor SUB_INT SUB_REAL Rung Number ii a Displays rung number for each al discrete rung Local All System Temporary Type Len Addres Description Stored Yalue 5 Run Enabled Connected 2 0 msec E qual For Help press F1 Variable Declaration Table Docked at the bottom of the folder view provides quick access to global variables and local variables defined for the active block VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Customizing the LD Editor Window VersaPro allows you to select the format of information displayed in the LD Editor window and control the grid and di
2. 2 Some of the SVCREQ functions are different between the 90 30 and 90 70 For example SVCREQ 26 in the 90 30 is Interrogate I O while in the 90 70 it is Role Switch Also the parameter data format for the same service requests may be different in the 90 30 and 90 70 Examples are SVCREQ 7 15 and 23 4 20 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Converting Logic from 90 70 to 90 30 VersaMax Tips for Converting 90 70 Logic to 90 30 Logic The Series 90 70 PLC provides many features and functions such as FOR END_FOR EXIT_FOR that are not available on the Series 90 30 PLC Some of them can be simulated on the 90 30 using more basic language features while others such as VME functions Multiple Standalone C Programs PSBs or C blocks with parameters cannot If your application must use 90 70 features that cannot be simulated on a 90 30 then you will not be able to convert the application to a 90 30 platform The following tips will help minimize the conversion effort in cases where conversion to 90 30 is possible 1 Avoid using any 90 70 instruction or function that is not supported on the 90 30 See the table describing 90 70 and 90 30 instruction differences 2 Avoid using UINT or BCD8 types of instructions since these types of instructions are not available on the 90 30 Instead of UINT instructions use INT or DINT instructions 3 Do not use the CV output of timer or counter
3. Name Resolution and Routing Ethernet Global Data He RACH 1 Fe MA Sa a 14 6 manent zanai e Hdd Tamer Base Ta AGT Ere Ct 12 Power Supply Peete lanier base Inser Wennleny bese ICBS3CHS 391 Base 10 Slot Relate eanerbace Changing Rack Type To change rack type 1 Position the cursor anywhere in the Rack window then click the right mouse button 2 Choose Change Rack Type 3 Click the catalog number and description of the type matching your system then click the OK button Note Change Rack Type is only active for Series 90 70 and non imbedded Series 90 30 CPUs CPU331 and higher 7 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Changing Configuring Power Supply and CPU Configuring a Power Supply To change the default power supply 1 Click the power supply slot in the Rack window 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Replace Module 3 Click the catalog number and description of the power supply in your system then click the OK button 4 Respond to prompts if any appear 5 When you replace the default power supply the Parameter Editor appears allowing you to view detailed power consumption information If you are using the default power supply you can double click on the power supply slot in the Rack window to view the details 6 When you have finished click the OK button Configuring a CPU To change the default CPU 1 From the
4. November 2004 GFK 1670D Verifying Folder Data To verify that the Folder matches what is currently running in the PLC follow the steps below You can verify hardware configuration logic or overridden stored values with the PLC 1 Confirm that you are connected to the PLC The VersaPro status bar should indicate Connected If the status bar is not visible press Ctrl 0 2 From the PLC menu choose Verify or click the Verify with PLC button al 3 The Verify Folder with PLC dialog box will appear Verify Folder with PLC ES Options Cancel Verify hardware configuration and motion with PLC I Verify logic with PLC Verity overridden stored values with PLC Help 4 Components that have a check mark next to them will be verified You can select and deselect individual components by clicking them 5 To begin the verify procedure click the OK button 6 A message box will confirm that the verify operation is complete The Information Window will contain details about the Verify operation GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 21 Reading Writing Verifying Flash Memory Certain CPU models support a flash memory option that allows you to store Folder data to the flash memory device located on the PLC To perform read write or verify operations on the PLC s Flash memory follow these steps 1 Connect to the PLC 2 Select the PLC menu and choose Flash EEPROM The Read Write V
5. PLCs VersaPro is designed to install and run under Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT 4 0 and Windows 2000 With VersaPro you can Create PLC logic and information associated with that logic in a folder Configure PLC Hardware Create and edit variables Create edit and monitor the execution of Ladder or Instruction List logic Create Motion Local Logic and Cam programs for the 90 30 DSM314 Motion module Chapter Contents GFK 1670D Overview of the VersaPro Programming Software components The Workbench Window Configuring Workbench Options setting editor and target hardware 1 1 Installing VersaPro Software Note VersaPro must be installed on a hard drive in your computer Do not attempt to install VersaPro on removable media such as Jaz or Zip drives 1 Itis recommended that you close all applications including virus checking Internet Explorer and CIMPLICITY HMI software that might be running in the background You may need to check the task manager to determine if other applications are running Put the VersaPro CD in the CD ROM Drive Select the CD drive from Windows Explorer Double click Setup exe oy Ee ee Follow the user prompts to complete the installation If you have a previous version of VersaPro installed the installation tool will first uninstall the previous version During this uninstall process you may be asked whether you would like remove shared files It is recommended that yo
6. aj MAIN blk File name Gen Insert as Cancel Files oftype Block Files blk z Offsets l Inser block with offsets 4 Select the block type blk for LD IL Local Logic or Motion blocks exe for C blocks To change the name of the block edit the name in the Insert As box 6 To define variable offsets for the block or add a prefix or suffix to the variable names select the Insert Block With Offsets checkbox then click the Offsets button GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 5 Insert Block HE J Examples fel l el Scene Bit Memory Word Memory l mo Al jo 20 a FND jo Highest Used Yoh fo R fo Cancel 67 fo tell AE jo Look In Variable Rename Pretix C Suffix File name NuBlock Insert as Black_1 Files oftype Block Files blk i Insertblock with offsets Offsets 7 Make the needed changes in the Define Variable Offsets dialog box and click Accept 8 In the Insert Block dialog box click Open The block is copied to the current folder s directory If the Folder itself Hardware Configuration or the Variable Declaration table are selected in the Folder Browser tree the block is inserted at the bottom of the tree If a block or view table is selected the block appears above the selected item If the inserted block has the same name as an existing block an error message appears Adding a block includes add
7. e To print the LLVT select the LLVT and choose Print from the File menu or press Ctrl P To open the Local Logic Variable Table To open the LLVT select Local Logic Variable Table from the View menu press Alt 6 or click the Toggle Local Logic Variable Table button on the toolbar E GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 7 z Information Provided by the Local Logic Variable Table The LLVT contains the following tabs Axis 1 Axis 2 Axis 3 Axis 4 Global CTL Bits Parameter Registers Each tab provides the following information Name This column contains the variable name which can be used within a local logic program Type The data type for this variable Attempting to write a value larger than a given variable size will result in the value being truncated For example if the result of a math operation is 32 bits long and is assigned to a 16 bit variable only the low 16 bits will be stored The Parser reports a warning if a Bit Operand is used as the destination variable in a non Boolean Math operation only the least significant bit of the result would be stored Local Logic variables that are less than 32 bits long are either Signed or Unsigned except Bit Operands which are always Unsigned All Math Logic operations in the Logic Engine are signed 32 bit operations except the 64 bit signed Divide and Modulus operations Signed variables that are less than 32 bits long are automatically sign extended to 32 b
8. sssesssesssesssessseesssersserssersse 10 15 Connecting to the PLC ssnnssenssensssessssesssessserssersserssersserssersssrsssesssersserssersseres 10 16 Transferring Folds scsssssesissaviatievtvscshaweecabbevvscntievencctuecteensievenexs 10 17 Storing a Folder to the PLC T kj n 10 17 Word for Word Changes in LD s ssseessoessonsseesssesssessseesserssersssesssrsssesssersserss 10 18 Loading a folder to Your Computer re 10 19 TG arn 1 PLU sos ag vcny sp can ecsece acess coesetenseevecsbisavsceoseeaecseieswas 10 20 MELILV IND Folder DACA cocesetevecevecesecesavesesavvcesavenssesecsvecesavenseswecesexs 10 21 Reading Writing Verifying Flash Memory ssscscssscesees 10 22 Reading Writing Verifying the EZ Program Store Device 10 23 Viewing PLC Status Information ccccscccssssccsssccsssscessces 10 24 Placing the PLC in Run or Stop Mode cccccssssssseoeeees 10 26 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 11 Appendix A GFK 1670D Contents Monitoring Logic Execution ccccsscccsssccsssccssssccssscccsssoesees 10 27 Turning Monitoring On and Off cc ceecccseseccseeeceeseceenseeseees 10 27 Changing the Display Format of Monitored Loglc 0 10 28 Update in progress or unavailable Press F1 for Help 10 28 Searchme TOL CVC es yrs a vie ciance E E E E 10 29 Working with Fault Tables
9. Deleting Carriers You must use the menu bar or right mouse operations to delete a carrier Perform these steps to delete a carrier 1 Highlight the empty carrier you want to delete 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Delete Carrier Clearing the Rack Clearing the rack removes all modules except the power supply and CPU If you save the Hardware Configuration after clearing the rack the configuration information about the deleted modules will be lost Perform these steps to clear the rack configuration 1 Click anywhere in the Rack 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Clear Rack 3 A confirmation dialog box will appear To confirm the clear rack operation click the Yes button Configuring VersaMax Expansion Networks There are three types of configurations in the VersaMax rack system To change the rack configuration select the type you want from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Expansion Rack System submenu None Includes only the Main VersaMax rack no Expansion Systems created using VersaPro 1 0 have this type of configuration This is the default VersaMax System which is created when you select New from the File menu or when you convert from another rack system such as Series 90 30 GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 23 Local Single Rack Includes the Main VersaMax I O station and one Expansion rack The Main VersaMax rack does not contain a Transmitter The Expansion
10. Keep Tabs Saves the tabs as tab characters No automatic indenting of code Default Indent code using the Tab Size The indent is based on the scope words Indents the current line the same as the line directly above it 3 Select the tab and auto indent options you want 4 Click OK GFK 1670D Chapter I Introduction I 13 synchronizing VersaPro with HWC 1 14 The VersaPro user interface displays only features that are appropriate to the current hardware configuration HWC For example if HWC contains a Series 90 30 CPU the Function Toolbar does not display functions that are used only on the 90 70 When you change to a different CPU in hardware configuration you will need to synchronize VersaPro with HWC by performing one of the following operations Open the Block Properties New Block Dialog Check All or Check Block s Load from PLC Import SNF variables Export SNF variables Store to PLC Verify with PLC Convert Block Save Folder Save ALL Connect to PLC VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders A folder contains all of the components required to program configure and monitor your Series 90 70 Series 90 30 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro and Series 90 Micro PLCs The components include Hardware Configuration Variable Declaration Table View Tables and program blocks You can also insert other windows components into the folder like
11. Replace Click this button to replace the highlighted instance of the search string in your program Replace All Button Click this button to replace all occurrences of the search string in your program 4 To close the Find Replace dialog box click the Cancel button Note If a Find and Replace action has been specified during the current edit session you can use the Find Next to locate additional occurrences of the search string using the Find Next command To find the next instance select the Edit menu and choose Find Next or press F3 GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 19 Performing Syntax Checks 3 20 VersaPro provides syntax checking for logic blocks Once you ve created block logic you can check either portions of the folder or the entire folder all blocks for syntax errors In a syntax check instructions within your logic are compared against information about the configured PLC Any unsupported instructions are flagged Syntax checking is automatically performed when you store or verify logic to the PLC To manually initiate a syntax check perform the following steps e To Check All Blocks go to the Folder Browser click the right mouse button and select Check All or select the Check All Blocks toolbar button e To Check Selected Blocks highlight the blocks you want to check in the Folder Browser click the right mouse button and select Check Selected Blocks or select the Check Selected Blocks too
12. 0O 0O O PT_ID name ADDR DESC PT_TYPE LENGTH RETENTIVE OVERRIDE STORED_VAL SHOW_EXT Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 15 All other field names and corresponding data entries are ignored e Empty data entries default to the same default entry as the VDT e Any data entries that violate row validation contain invalid entries for a particular field other than the PT_TYPE field or repeated variables produce a conflict error e All imported SNF variables are added to the global table unless another block has been specified in the address field e Imported SNF variables are added below any existing variables e Selecting Cancel from the Conflict dialog cancels the entire import process All data is purged e Any Description that contains quotation marks must start and end with quotation marks to determine where separations occur between Descriptions and the additional text in the variable To export a variable 1 From the VDT select the variable or variables that you wish to export 2 Choose Export Variable from the VDT CSM or the Tools menu If no variables are selected an error message appears informing you that at least one variable must be selected in order to export A dialog appears asking you to determine the location to which you wish to save the exported file 3 Choose a location The default export location is the last Import Export directory used Click OK 6 16 VersaPro
13. 1 Highlight the carrier which will house the module 2 Double click on the empty carrier or click the right mouse button and choose Add Module If you are replacing a previously configured module click the right mouse button and choose Replace Module 3 Click the tab describing the I O module type you need Discrete Input Discrete Output Analog Input Analog Output etc 4 Click the catalog number and description of the module in your system then click the OK button Configuring Module Parameters To configure the module s parameters 1 When you add or replace a module the Parameter Editor appears You can also access this window by double clicking the module slot from the Rack window 2 Within the Parameter Editor click the tab pertaining to the parameters you want to view or modify where applicable 3 Click in the Values fields you want to edit See Editing Tips on page 7 4 4 When you have finished configuring module parameters click the window close button 7 22 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Deleting Rack Modules Deleting a module removes it from the rack If you save the Hardware Configuration after deleting the module the configuration information about the deleted module will be lost Perform these steps to delete a module 1 Select the module you want to delete 2 Press the Delete key or click the right mouse button and choose Delete Module
14. 3 Choose whether to show or hide the variable name reference address and description Each of the checked items appears in the LD Editor 4 Determine whether variable names and descriptions should be displayed in part or full by selecting Brief or Full for each 5 The variable description and or reference address display in the bottom portion of each cell according to the current cell width Text that exceeds the available space is replaced with GFK 1670D Chapter I Introduction l 11 1 12 To set LD Editor grid cell width VersaPro allows you to change the width of LD Editor grid cells to make more text visible Only the width of the cells changes cell height and font size remain unchanged l Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the LD Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears Select the Ladder tab Under Grid Cell Width drag the slider to the right to increase the grid cell size or to the left to decrease the size Click OK The LD Editor grid changes to the new size VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Setting Motion Program Local Logic Editor Options 1 Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears 2 Select the MP LL Editors Tab Tab Size Sets the number of spaces that is equal to one tab Valid values are integers 1 to 64 Insert Spaces Converts the tabs to the number of spaces specified in Tab Size
15. Converters IC690ACC900 B 5 IC690ACC901 B 8 IC690CCM590 B 10 RS 232 RS 485 B 5_ Converting Blocks 3 21 B 22 guidelines 3 22 Converting logic 90 30VersaMax to 90 70 90 70 to 90 30 VersaMax Converting Rack Systems Copy as bitmap 4 16 CPU firmware revision checking CPU model checking CPU Redundancy CPU configuring series 90 30 90 70 7 9 VersaMax 7 21 Creating a New Folder 2 2 based on VersaPro folder Creating and modifying variables 6 5 Creating New Reference Variable View Tables 8 4 Cross reference of variables creating 6 14 CSM 2 15 Customizing display IL editor 5 3 LD editor 4 3 view table format 8 7 Customizing View Tables 8 5 Cut Copy Paste IL editor 5 8 LD editor GFK 1670D using in the variable declaration table6 8 view tables 8 10 D DATA_INIT functions properties Date and time viewing and eT 10 25 Default rack type Deleting in LD editor Deleting ec Deleting Carriers VersaMax Deleting rack modules Series 90 30 90 70 7 11 I Deleting rack modules VersaMax Deleting variables 6 12 Device CCU configuring DEFAULT 10 4 Differences in language capability 90 70 vs 90 30 VersaMax Direct serial port connection Display format changing monitored logic 10 28 Reference View Tables Variable View Tables Display options setting Docking Editing Ladder Logic4 15 EGD See E
16. Correcting Errors To automatically correct an erroneous value right click on the value and select Auto Correct from the context sensitive menu If you attempt to close a configuration that contains an error the Parameter Error List dialog box will appear To automatically correct all errors listed in this dialog box click the Auto Correct button Shortcut Keys for HWC You can edit information in Hardware Configuration through menu bar selections the context sensitive menu or short cut key sequences 7 6 To edit modules using the menu bar click the module or slot you want to configure go to the Edit menu and select the appropriate action To edit modules using the right mouse button click the module or slot you want to configure click the right mouse button and select the appropriate action To edit modules using standard cut copy and paste functions highlight the module and use the Edit menu options or CTRL key shortcuts To copy a module click the module you want to copy and press CTRL C To paste the module click the new slot and press CTRL V To cut a module which allows you to paste it in another slot click the module and press CTRL X To delete a module click the module and select Delete from the Edit Menu or press the Delete key To Undo a previous operation press CTRL Z You can use drag and drop to move modules between slots To use drag and drop highlight the module you want to move click and
17. Folder Toolbar vciicdaieis cas eevee es Ge ete Ge ie Gee A 10 PEC OOM I ssc isaac cies Sees eee ei eed ese A 11 Puncion Toobi acne one ore ee one oe eRe ee ee Re A 11 HWE Memis eocssesdccsscedocusceadetenscesessussesceese takecaveeadatersgesesenesaseeeseces A 12 Fie As Fe Mere oe gO te ree rR CR A 12 EJU NOAUA Ree eR nnn arn a ce a ann ean aa A 13 Edit menu Expansion Rack System Submenu cccccsesecceeeeeeeeseceeeseeneneees A 13 Edit menu Expansion Receiver SuDMENU ccecccseeeeceeseeceeeeeseneceaeseeneneees A 14 Edit menu Rack Operations SUDMEeNU cecccceeccecseseeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeneees A 14 Edit menu Module Operations SubMenu ceccccseecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeaesesneneens A 15 Parameter Ment zicas tazicauapacashassntesalasateshaistaelalashacsoleaelwelnaicaks A 15 View Menmi errea a E EE A 16 View Menu Parameter Edit Submenu 0 0 0 0 cece ec ee cece ecececcecscescecscesescsceseees A 16 Tools Men esioes doc nde coied A ees ee eh ceid eas ei weed es ei tc A 16 Regundaney Men sic sratuieuctaelneieiedctentasiueiseedabeeataatuganeetetaeieeeat A 17 WPO Me niee es oe es or oS eR A 17 PIG WGI ss shed taticinyeten ai doticin toate telet T A 17 EVV CO OUD AF sovcncesscssiccesenstacecstbos lt cotevewedeteicceselstevecsbever lt ecteheusdents A 18 Serial Connections ws sssccnsisciesenizedecevsscdecend cased EE B 1 Serial Port and Cables ceseecsccseecseesecccccseecssccsecscccseescecse
18. GE Fanuc Automation Programmable Control Products VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide GFkK 1670D November 2004 GFL 002 Warnings Cautions and Notes as Used in this Publication Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages currents temperatures or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or may be associated with its use In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment a Warning notice is used Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken Note Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and operating the equipment This document is based on information available at the time of its publication While efforts have been made to be accurate the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software nor to provide for every possible contingency in connection with installation operation or maintenance Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty expressed implied or statutory with respect to and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy compl
19. To delete a Cam block from the VersaPro folder select the block in the folder browser and press the Delete key or choose Delete from the Edit menu or CSM Duplicating a Cam Block To duplicate a Cam block select it in the folder browser and choose Copy Ctrl C from the Edit menu or CSM You can paste Ctrl P the block into the same folder or a different folder If you paste it into the same folder you will be asked to provide a new name Each component in the folder must have a unique name GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 15 2 Viewing and Editing Cam Block Properties To view the name description and module type for a Cam block select Properties from the Edit menu or the CSM The Name and Description can be edited at any time DSM314 is the only module that supports Cam blocks Renaming a Cam Block To rename a Cam block select the block then choose Properties from the Edit menu or CSM or press Alt Enter Type a new name in the Cam tab of the Properties dialog box Using Cam Profiles in a Motion Program Cam profiles are referenced by name in the associated Motion program Cam profiles are grouped into Cam blocks which are downloaded to the DSM314 module with the hardware configuration via the PLC For a Cam profile to function in a Motion program the following conditions must be met e The specified profile must be defined in the Cam Library and linked to a Cam block using the Cam Editor To execu
20. 2 From the Folder menu select Lock The Folder Security dialog box will appear e To lock the folder without a password click OK GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 19 2 20 To lock the folder with password protection check the Lock with Password checkbox Enter the password in both the Enter Password and Verify Password fields The password is case sensitive A password must be eight characters or less Valid password characters are digits 0 9 uppercase A Z and lowercase a z letters and the underscore _ Once the folder is successfully locked the folder title bar will display READ_ONLY indicating that the folder is protected You cannot edit any portions of the folder except for temporarily adding variables to existing view tables Note Once a folder is locked with a password that password cannot be changed To assign a new password unlock the folder then lock it with a new password VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Operations permitted on locked folders Edit existing view tables You may not create new view tables Variables already defined in the Variable Declaration Table may be added to VVTs for the purposes of monitoring but the changes cannot be saved New variables may not be created in the VVT Addresses may be added to RVTs but cannot be saved e Open and close windows or blocks e Rearrange windows e Monitor logic execution e Toggle and Over
21. 2000 11 50 24 Validating Harc 000 11 56 24 Converted to Ver oe Total Al 0000 Highest 0000 Limit 0126 Ready NUM ve 7 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Hardware Configuration Toolbar When you launch HWC the main window displays While you are working in Hardware Configuration you may want to display the Hardware Configuration toolbar which provides access to commonly used areas of Hardware Configuration To display the Hardware Configuration toolbar go to the View menu and place a checkmark next to Toolbar F i g 5 a E 5 EF 2 E a 7 S a iE wos uP 4 Pe Sess a ae amp G z RERE ss 8325 8 my G for oe Fe Using the Parameter Editor To configure module parameters you will use the Parameter Editor which appears automatically when you insert or replace a module To change parameters for a module choose Configure Parameters from the context sensitive menu or choose Configure Parameters from the Edit Module Operations submenu or double click on the module The Parameter Editor provides an extended set of Windows compatible editing facilities to make configuring your system less labor intensive e Parameters are displayed in an edit window that can be resized maximized and minimized You can open multiple parameter views at the same time This feature allows you to view the parameter set of one module while editing another and you can easily cop
22. 4 9 entering using toolbar LD Instructions data length entering 4 5 function address 4 5 LD_BOOL LDN_BOOL Length completing in IL Editor completing in LD Editor 4 9 License transferring C 1 Load Store Verify RIO confi guration 7 29 Loading folder from PLC RIO configuration 7 31 VersaMax hardware configurations 7 27 Local Logic editor Local Logic Variable Table Locked blocks ad a Logicmaster Locking GFK 1670D Index Index blocks peel Log file size setting 7 7 Log View hardware configuration Logic editor window 2 13 Logicmaster 90 70 before release 6 importing a folder 2 7 Maximum block size 3 7 Memory 10 23 EZ Program Store flash memory 10 22 _ Menu bar and toolbars 2 13 Menus HWC VersaPro A 1 Miniconverter kit cable diagrams B 10 RS 232 port pin assignments RS 422 SNP to RS 232 RS 422 ort pin assignments system configurations B 10 Modem connections 10 12 Modem Turnaround Time Modems configuration and cabling Modules Series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Monitoring logic Motion Program editor Motion Program Local Logic blocks restoring 9 11 Motion Program Local Logic options setting 9 2 Multidrop connections B 7 Multiple instances of VersaPro 1 3 Index 5 Index N Name Resolution restoring 7 41 Name Resolution and Routing Table confi nication 7301 Nesting Boolean
23. GBC Pair Internal Dual Bus two PLCs Dual Bus Redundancy GBC Pair External Redundant Controllers one PLC Dual Bus Redundancy GBC Pair Internal Redundant Controllers two PLCs Dual GBC Redundancy GBC Pair External Dual Bus and Redundant Controllers two Genius Dual Bus amp Dual GBC Redundancy PLCs 4 Select rack and slot locations for the primary GBC and the Paired GBC Click Next 5 Review the settings for Redundancy Scheme and GBC locations If settings are correct click Finish If you need to make changes click Back When you click Finish the software will create the Genius bus GBC configuration If you have two GBCs the parameter settings of the second GBC except for the rack and slot numbers and SBA will be a copy of those of the first GBC These two GBCs will by default be assigned Serial Bus Addresses SBAs 30 and 31 Each bus will contain an image of its GBC To configure devices on a Genius bus see Genius Bus Configuration To copy the device configurations from a redundant bus to its partner select Wizard from the Redundancy menu Choose Copy a Redundant Bus and click Next Follow the Wizard instructions to complete the copy operation If your system has two PLC racks see Configuring the Second PLC Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 17 Configuring a VersaMax Modular Rack When you enter Hardware Configuration for VersaMax equipment folders the default view is the Rack Main The power su
24. Invert the Boolean state of the Accumulator Accumulator Type unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Accumulator Accumulator AND Boolean Variable Address Accumulator Accumulator AND NOT Boolean Variable Accumulator Accumulator AND Boolean expression Accumulator Type unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Accumulator Accumulator OR Boolean Variable Address Accumulator Accumulator OR NOT Boolean Variable Accumulator Accumulator OR Boolean expression Accumulator Type unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Accumulator Accumulator XOR Boolean Variable Address Accumulator Accumulator XOR NOT Boolean Variable Accumulator Type unchanged Boolean Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type unchanged Integer SUB Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type unchanged Integer MUL Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type unchanged Integer DIV Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type unchanged Integer 5 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Description Effect on Accumulator Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator MOD operand Constant Accumulator Type unchanged Integer Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator gt operand C
25. Select the Display tab General Display Ladder Communications Category Colors LD j Background AWT Comments VDT WAT Font Size Ms Serif le Sample aBbr yez Cancel Help 2 You can change the font selection and change the colors used for the display of online values animate background display color and color used to display comments 3 Make the desired changes Click OK to accept GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 3 Entering Instructions and Instruction Parameters This section describes how to enter and modify IL logic Instructions consist of program elements to perform Boolean logic and execute functions such as timers math functions and other functions Variables and constants are assigned as operands for the instruction Selecting the Instruction Instructions are selected directly in the IL Editor window To add a new instruction or change an existing instruction perform the following steps 1 Select the location where you want to add a new instruction or modify an existing instruction 2 Double click the cell The Instruction combo box will appear as shown below Ref Address LO BOOL 100001 T00001 ai AND mIo mI00g0S SI BOOL 000001 O00001 LO FOOL I00001 T0000 AND ADD_INT a fs ADD REAL 5 AND ANDI AND WORD ANDN ANDN i ARRAY MOVE BOOLI ARRAY MOVE BYTE ae ARRAY MOVE DINT J 3 Select the instruction Function
26. The default scope for variables 1s Global Scope You may assign an existing variable or create a new variable for the instruction operand This section describes how to assign variables to parameters using the mouse and the keyboard GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 5 5 6 To assign an existing variable using keyboard entry Ie Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the operand where you want to assign a variable Type or select the variable as follows To select a variable from the list of defined variables press Enter The variable combo box will appear Use the up and down arrow keys to display the variables When you find the variable you want to use press Enter to accept To enter a variable by name simply type the variable name Press Enter to accept To assign an existing variable using the mouse l Double click on the operand where you want to assign a variable The variable combo box will appear To expand the variable list click the arrow on the combo box Use the slide control to scroll up and down through the list Select the variable from the list Press Enter or click outside the operand area to accept To create a new variable for an instruction operand l Select the instruction operand using the keyboard or mouse Keyboard Select Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the operand where you want to assign a variable Press Enter The variable combo
27. always shown The Main VersaMax rack contains a Transmitter IC200ETMO001 Each Expansion I O Station contains a Power Supply and Receiver Integrated Unit The Non Isolated Receiver IC200ERMO002 which is configured by default can be replaced by an Isolated Receiver JC200ERMO001 Note The Transmitter module cannot be selected from the module catalog The only way to add this module to a rack configuration is to choose the appropriate configuration type Also you cannot delete a Transmitter module from a rack configuration except by changing the rack configuration type GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A 13 Edit menu Expansion Receiver Submenu The Expansion Receiver submenu of the Edit menu allows you to select the receiver for a VersaMax Local Single Rack or Multiple Remote Rack system Deactivates the Receiver This is the default selection if no carrier base is configured This option is not available if there is at least one carrier base configured in the expansion rack Non Isolated Receiver Unit Selects the Non Isolated Receiver and Power Supply Integrated Unit IC200ERMO002 This is the only receiver type allowed for Local Single Rack systems Isolated Receiver Unit Selects the Non Isolated Receiver IC200ERMO002 This option is available only for Multiple Remote Rack systems Edit menu Rack Operations Submenu Change Rack Type Displays the 90 30 Change Rack Type Dialog This menu item is not ava
28. folder to open By default the Nickname is the last seven characters of the folder name The Nickname may be viewed and set in the Folder Properties dialog box Choose Properties from the Edit menu or the folder root node CSM 7 Click OK Note To turn off Autoconnect select the Communications tab in the Options dialog and uncheck the Enable Autoconnect button GFK 1670D Chapter I Introduction 1 9 Setting PLC Firmware Revision Checking To select the level of firmware revision checking to be performed before a Store operation l Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears Select the Communications tab Choose the level of revision checking that you want to use No firmware revision checking during The store process proceeds without checking store Warn during store if firmware revision If the PLC s firmware is not compatible with VersaPro a is incompatible warning dialog box appears when you attempt to store You may choose to continue the store process or cancel it Prevent store to incompatible firmware Default selection If the PLC s firmware is not compatible revisions with VersaPro an error message is displayed and the store is cancelled 4 Click OK Note For a list of compatible CPU firmware versions see PLC Firmware Compatibility List in the online help index or the readme txt file provided on the VersaPro CD_ROM Program Overwrite War
29. sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu Only the last Expansion Unit in the chain can be deleted Note The main module cannot be deleted from the system To remove all Expansion Units from the system select Clear Rack from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Rack Operations submenu When you add or replace a module the Parameter Editor window will appear Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 45 Counter Pulse Width Modulation and Pulse Train Output To configure the High Speed Counter Pulse Width Modulation and or Pulse Train Output functions go to the Edit menu and select Module Operations Configure Parameters HSC PWM PTO You can also choose Configure Parameters HSC PWM PTO from the context sensitive menu A Parameter Editor window similar to the one shown below will appear Nano PLCs have only three counter tabs For details on configuring these functions choose Module Help from the Help menu HSC Ph FTO settings Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Parameters Yalues al COA Fn 4 Type A E Output Stop Mode Normal Reference Address woll4o4 Length ed Reference Address zoad0dgg HSCF PTO ve PWM Frequency and Duty Cycle The frequency and duty cycle of the PWM output are specified from the application program Pulse Train Output frequency is also controlled from the application program duty cycle is nominally 50 For details on configuring and using these features re
30. the cell will display 8 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Reference View Tables Overview Reference View Tables RVTs contain a list of references that can be monitored and updated in real time A folder can have zero or more reference tables RVTs can be cut and copied and dragged and dropped between Folders More than one Reference Area can be entered into a single RVT The number of entries contained in an RVT does not affect the performance of the RVT Performance is affected only by the number of entries that are displayed and have to be updated in the view Example RVTs are shown below Starting address Format of selected address Selected address aDecimal oN00000000000000100111 0001000 Y Display format can be selected for individual cells U f oooooooo QOO00000 O1000000 OO000000 00100001 00100001 CT OO O00000 so100081 a 0 1bFZICo AIDON ee a o a o a a a All Reference Addresses are displayed that begin with the closest byte offset smaller than or equal to the starting address you enter and finish eight columns later Ten columns of data are displayed for R AI and AQ reference addresses The amount of data displayed in the columns depends on the format Note Upon opening a folder created with VersaPro 1 00 the Reference View Tables will be converted to the new format However table format selections will be reset to the defaults GFK 1670D
31. txeeaeskagessntseeanseaessabessaaseedecsaehaees 7 11 CVG it TNS RACK a A E E E 7 11 Genius Bus Configuration Series 90 70 PLCs sessessensseesseenss 7 12 Bus Operations ccccceccccsesccceeeceeeeeceeeeecaeeeeeeeeeeeseeseseeeeneeeaeneeas 7 12 DOCK Oi AMOS repapceecestne see E E E aire 7 13 PURGING ANC y osne E e E A EE 7 14 Configuring CPU Redundancy Over Gemlus ccccceeeeeeeeeees 7 14 CPU Redundancy Over Genius TYyp0s cccccsecccesecceeseceeneeeeeseeeeneeeeeeeenaneees 7 14 General Procedure for Configuring CPU Redundancy Over Genius 7 15 Use of Rack 7 in CPU Redundancy Over Genius Schemes seceeseeeees 7 15 Storing the Configurations to the PLCS ccccccecccccseccceeeeeeeeecaeeeeesseeeeeeeesenes 7 16 Configuring the Genius Redundant System ccceccceeeeeeeeeees 7 17 Genius Redundancy Types secari Ea aE aE E 7 17 General Procedure for Configuring the Genius Redundant System 0 7 17 ORR ITN the Second PLO acc oe tease nate casts cam santnensaandaan hart cacn teas nen a ai 7 18 Configuring a VersaMax Modular Rack cccccssssccsssssoeees 7 19 Changing Configuring the CPU eeccccsecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeees 7 20 Rack Module Operations ccccceccccsesecceseceesceeenseeaseeeeeseeaeeeees 7 20 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D GFK 1670D Contents Changing Configuring t
32. 3 rep Cut from the Edit or Context Sensitive menu click the Cut button Ee press Ctrl X The selected item and its contents are moved to the clipboard It may now be pasted within other VersaPro folders or to another application Copying Folder Components Note To copy a block it must be closed 1 Open the Folder Browser 2 Select an item or number of items in the Folder Browser The Folder node and the VDT cannot be copied 3 spse Copy from the Edit or Context Sensitive menu click the Copy button J or press Ctrl C The selected item and its contents are copied to the clipboard They may now be pasted within other VersaPro folders or to another application Pasting Folder Components 1 Cut or copy an item from the Folder Browser 2 In the same or another folder select an item above which you wish to paste the cut or copied item 3 Ie Paste from the Edit or Context Sensitive menu click the Paste button or press Ctrl V 4 Ifthe item you are pasting already exists in the folder a dialog appears asking you to provide a new name for the item 5 Type anew name for the item then click OK The item is pasted above the selected item in the Folder Browser 3 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Dragging and Dropping in the Folder Browser You can use drag and drop to move or copy components within a folder or between VersaPro folders The following drag and dro
33. 6 0 9 PIN 9 PIN 4 ct i Sint ae Pe ee ee 0 MALE FEMALE ae i JST a 2 ae ve o OO XT Ta Xoni a o 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 E E DERAS F 0 0 O ST S J i 0 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN y y 8 y g 15 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE C es C FEMALE RS 232 RS 422 PORT PORT AON POWER 5V a SOURCE WHEN WIRING RS 422 485 MULTIDROP CABLES REFLECTIONS ON FOR a TRANSMISSION LINE CAN BE REDUCED BY CONFIGURING THE CONVERTER ov 0 man ei A MASTER CONVERTER SLAVE LAST STATION a 0 PLC 15 PIN CONNECTOR 0 SERIES 90 30 LOCATED an ON POWER SUPPLY ae SERIES 90 70 LOCATED a ON THE CPU BOARD 0 ALSO IT IS RECOMMENDED TO MAKE ANY NECESSARY 0 NSIDE THE CABLE CONNECTOR TO BE MOUNTED ON THE PLC ITIS 0 RECOMMENDED TO USE TERMINAL STRIPS TO OTHER TYPES CONNECTORS ALONG THE LENGTH OF THE TRANSMISSION Y 15 PIN TO OTHER PLC s FEMALE Termination resistance for the receive data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines this termination is made on the Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771 The termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 Ground Potential multiple units not connected to the same power source must have common ground potentials proper operation of this system GFK 1670D Appendix B Serial Connections B 7 Miniconverter K
34. Allows you to insert a block into the Folder Browser Row Ins Inserts a row above the selected row in the IL editor LD editor VDT or a View Table Ae otc you to insert a comment Folder Menu Check Selected Block s Checks the selected block s for syntactic correctness If no block Ctrl F7 is selected this menu option reads Check Block_Main and selecting it results in checking the _Main block for syntactic correctness Check All F7 Checks all blocks for syntactic correctness Lock Unlock Locks or unlocks the open folder Backup F8 Cd Backs up a folder Restore Ctrl F8 Ld Restores a folder Restore Motion Blocks Allows you to restore individual Motion blocks that have been backed up during a Load operation Find Unused Variables Finds unused variables The unused variables are listed in the Information window by Name Scope and Address Compact Reduces the size of the folder by removing edit history information from the VDT A 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D PLC Menu Connect F9 m Connects to the PLC Disconnect Ctrl F9 Buo Disconnects from the PLC Store Alt F2 Stores the contents of a folder to the PLC Load Ctrl F2 Loads the contents of a folder from the PLC Verify F4 Verifies the equality of the current folder and the connected PLC Clears the memory of the PLC Flash EEPROM Allows you to read write or verify Flash mem
35. Decimal Oo O O 0 0O O Real Only available when Dword is selected O Scientific Notation Only available when Dword is selected You can change the display format of an individual cell by selecting the cell and choosing Display Format from the context sensitive menu 5 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Customizing Variable View Table Display Format You can customize the value display format for Variable View Tables To change the display format for online values perform the following steps 1 Open the VVT Select row containing the variable where you want to change the display format 2 Click the right mouse button and select Display Format from the CSM Binary Ctrl Shift B Octal Ctrl Shitt O Hex Ctrl Shitt H Unsigned Decimal Ctrl Shift U Signed Decimal Ltrl Shitt D Peal Gps nice et amente Hatatam Emrem 3 Change the display to suit your application requirements The format is changed for the variable selected Note If the value displays increase the width of the value column to see the online value GFK 1670D Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 7 Adding Elements to a View Table You can add logic elements references or variables to a View Table for online monitoring You may be either off line or on line when you add a new entry to a Variable View Table If you are on line and equal to the PLC the new variable s data updates automatica
36. Go to Yarable Enter the variable name Cancel it 2 Enter the name of the variable that you want to go to or select it from the drop down list 3 Click OK The variable that you entered becomes selected in the Variable Declaration Table GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 7 a Using Cut Copy Paste and Drag and Drop in the VDT VersaPro allows you to cut or copy and then paste variables or cells in single or multiple variables within the Variable Declaration Table without removing ladder elements from ladder logic or instructions from instruction list logic It also allows you to paste items placed on the clipboard by applications other than VersaPro into the Variable Declaration Table and to cut or copy items to the clipboard for pasting to any other application that accepts tab delimited text Pasting overwrites any information in a cell or variable VersaPro also allows you to drag and drop cut or copy within the VDT or from the Variable Declaration Table to either editor Dropping in the VDT overwrites any information in a cell or variable To cut copy and paste in the Variable Declaration Table 1 Open the Variable Declaration Table Select a variable s or cell s within single or multiple variables 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu click the Cut button or the Copy button on the toolbar or press Ctrl C for Copy or Ctrl X for Cut To select a variable every f
37. If the Cam editor is installed it can be used with DSM314 release 2 0 or later Syntax Checking VersaPro provides a tool to check that your program is syntactically valid before storing to the PLC PLC VersaPro supports serial and Ethernet connections to the Series 90 70 Series Communications 90 30 and VersaMax PLCs Online Online monitoring and control is supported in logic editors and Reference Monitoring View Tables and Variable View Tables fr Fault System The fault system provides the ability to view PLC and I O fault tables in the PLC Information The Information Window displays the results of actions performed in Window VersaPro GFK 1670D Chapter 1 Introduction 1 3 The following abbreviations are used in VersaPro Abbreviation Component Abbreviation Component RLD Relay Ladder Diagram LL Local Logic RVT Reference View Table LLVT Local Logic Variable Table 1 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D The Workbench Window When you first start VersaPro the workbench is displayed You can perform the following tasks from the workbench e Create and Open Folders e Backup and Restore VersaPro folders e Setup communications parameters Connect to the PLC and view Fault Tables e Customize Workbench Options Setting Workbench Options VersaPro allows you to customize editor and window options It is important to confirm the default language and hardware configuration before
38. Instruction List Editor window allows you to create edit display and monitor programs and blocks created in Instruction List This chapter introduces you to the IL Editor window and how you can customize its look as well as how to create and edit logic Only Series 90 30 and VersaMax PLCs support IL programs Chapter Contents How to access the IL Editor An overview of the IL Editor Window How to customize the IL Editor Window display How to enter and edit logic Details about Instruction List Operation 5 1 Overview of the Instruction List Editor The Instruction List Editor is used to create programs using the Instruction List programming language Instruction List is a text based language which consists of a series of instructions which combined represent actions to be performed on a PLC Instruction List Editor Window Displays IL Logic Columns include Label Instruction Operand Reference Address Value and Comment Lebel r operand fel Arese Vale Comment T Row Numbers Lists the number for each row in the IL Editor 5 2 LO_BOOL 100001 100001 AND sI00005 sI00005 sT_BOOL sooi O00001 Active Cell LO_BOOL 100001 lt I00001 To change the AND TOo002 I00002 contents of the ANDHN 100005 100005 active cell double ST BOOL M00115 M00115 click the cell LON BOOL sMo0iis M00115 A combo box will ST_EOOL M00113 M00113 appear displaying LD BOOL M00113 M00113 valid choices mas S
39. LD Boolean Value and Type Instruction SQRT_DINT SQRT_REAL Trig Functions Functions SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS ATAN Logarithmic Exponential Functions Functions LOG LN EXP Radian Conversion Functions Functions RAD_2_DEG DEG_2_ RAD Relational Functions Functions EQ_INT EQ_DINT EQ REAL NE_INT NE_DINT NE_REAL GT_INT GT_DINT GT_REAL GE_INT GE_DINT GE_REAL LT_INT LT_DINT LT_REAL LE_INT LE_DINT LE_REAL Relational Functions Functions RANGE_INT RANGE_DINT 5 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 Output Parameter Q Double Integer Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Real Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parame
40. Nano Micro configuring 7 43 VersaMax Rack configuring 7 19 VersaMax Remote I O configuring 7 28 VersaPro overview 1 3 GFK 1670D Index Index View Tables adding entries customizing options saving viewing online 8 14 W Wait Time 1 8 Warning color setting 7 7 Windows docking ona moving and resizing 2 16 Word for word changes Workbench options aa Workbench Window 1 5 Writing a value to a reference 8 10 Z Zoom ratio setting 4 4 Index 9
41. OF Ro0001 ROO 100002 2 71Mi OF Rooon R000 e There cannot be any contacts after a function The following rung is illegal in the 90 30 TOO l l l l T0000 INi OP Ro0001 4 22 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Issues in Logic Converted from 90 70 to 90 30 After you have converted a program from 90 30 VersaMax to 90 70 you should look for and correct the following 1 When you replace a 90 70 function such as SHFR_WORD with its 90 30 counterpart that has fewer parameters existing arguments may be out of place For example the 90 70 SHFR_WORD eIO0001 seo d a ROOM ROOWO TOOT 5 EOOD ROO See s a mm 2 Some SVCREQ functions are different between the 90 30 and 90 70 For example SVCREQ 26 in the 90 30 is Interrogate I O while in the 90 70 it is Role Switch Also the parameter data format for the same service requests may be different in the 90 30 and 90 70 Examples are SVCREQ 7 15 and 23 GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 23 Differences in Language Capability in VersaPro 90 70 vs 90 30 VersaMax Instruction Set Differences 90 70 FAULT NOFLT HIALR LOALR On Transition and N A Off Transition contacts OFDT ONDTR UPCTR DNCTR function blocks have No CV output CV output ADD SUB MUL DIV MOD available for UINT type N A for UINT or MIXED and MIXED for MUL amp D
42. Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Changing Configuring the Power Supply The default power supply is the IC200PWROOI To change the default power supply 1 Click the power supply slot click the secondary mouse button and select Replace Module Select the new power supply from the Module Catalog 2 The Parameter Editor window for the power supply will appear 3 When you are finished reviewing the power supply parameters click the window close button to close the Parameter Editor window Adding Module Carriers Carriers must be configured to house module in the VersaMax PLC Perform these steps to configure module carriers 1 To add a carrier to the right of configured modules click the right mouse button and choose Add Base Carrier The Module Catalog for Carriers will display To insert a carrier between two configured modules highlight the module which will be to the right of the new carrier click the right mouse button and choose Insert Base Carrier The Module Catalog for Carriers will display Note You must click the right mouse button over a module or carrier in the rack configuration to view configuration choices from the right mouse button 2 Click the catalog number and description of the carrier you want to add then click the OK button Adding Power Supply Booster Bases GFK 1670D Power Supply boosters may be added into the system configuration to power modules downstream from t
43. Q Integer Output Parameter Q Word Output Parameter Q Integer Output Parameter Q Double Integer Output Parameter CV Integer Output Parameter CV Integer GFK 1670D Function or Function Block Requires LD Boolean Instruction Resulting Accumulator Value and Type New Series 90 30 36x Function Blocks Function Blocks SER VersaMax Release 1 1 and later Function Blocks DRUM SCALE_INT SCALE_WORD Output Parameter Q Word Output Parameter OUT Integer Output Parameter OUT Word Nesting of Boolean Expressions The user can nest Boolean expressions using the AND and OR operators up to a nesting level of 8 When a nested Boolean expression is started with an AND or OR operator the next instruction must be a LD_BOOL or LDN_BOOL operator The only operators that are allowed within a nested Boolean expression are S R ST_BOOL STN_BOOL NT PT NOT AND OR and XOR Nested Boolean expressions can be used to evaluate complex Boolean equations A sample nested Boolean expression is as follows LD BOOL xI00001 xI00001 ANDY LD BOOL 100002 xI00002 OR TOOOLO TOOOLO AND TOOOL 1 TOOOL 1 ORE LD BOOL TOO032 TOOOS2 OR TOOO33 TOOO33 ST BOOL MMOO077 MOOO77 AND TOOOSS TOORE J AND TOOOSS TOORE OR xOO008 OO0087 J ST BOOL TOOO9S x TOOOIS No control instructions or function calls may be placed within nested Boolean expression GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Edito
44. Toolbars A 7 VersaPro Toolbars VersaPro has six toolbars the Standard toolbar the Ladder toolbar the View toolbar the Folder toolbar the PLC toolbar and the Function toolbar You may hide any or all toolbars to provide more space to work Unavailable toolbar buttons appear in dim gray Standard Toolbar aal slal xe 2 x S o The Standard toolbar is displayed by default although you can hide it The Standard toolbar buttons provide common functions such as opening folders saving folders and blocks cutting copying and pasting and undo and redo A 8 Creates a new folder ce Saves the selected block rm Copies the selected item to the Clipboard a Pastes the Clipboard contents to the selected area p 7 Aborts a communications action VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Ladder Toolbar PR at OF FE IH H L tr dat aat 90 70 PLCs only Use the Ladder toolbar to create ladder logic using click and drop Selects the normal pointer disables click and drop pe TEH Reset coil o E All PLCs High alarm contact 90 70 only Low alarm contact 90 70 only Positive transition contact 90 70 only Negative transition contact 90 70 only Note Pressing the Escape key disables drop mode and makes the pointer active again GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars View Toolbar BSS are poe Use the View to
45. When the block is restored the backup is not deleted If you are running out of disk space and don t want to keep backups you must use the MS Explorer or My Computer to navigate to the folder and manually delete the backup Backups have an mbk motion or lbk local logic extension VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Using the Cam Editor The Cam editor provides a means to create edit and manage electronic Cam profiles for DSM314 motion modules Each Cam profile specifies the response of a slave servo follower to a master position index Cam profiles are referenced by name in the associated motion program Cam profiles are grouped into Cam blocks each block is intended for download to the DSM314 module via a PLC controller A block can contain up to 40 profiles Installing the Cam Editor Note You must have Internet Explorer 5 0 installed on your computer to install the Cam editor The CAM editor is installed as a separate tool 1 Itis recommended that you close all applications including virus checking Internet Explorer and CIMPLICITY HMI software that might be running in the background You may need to check the task manager to determine if other applications are running Put the Cam Editor CD in the CD ROM Drive Select the CD drive from Windows Explorer Run setup exe to start the installation process ae ar ae Follow the user prompts to complete the installation G
46. a paste operation on the visible table will also be changed on any other table where they appear e Values that have been altered by a paste in the VDT are also altered in the IL and LD program logic displays GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 9 For cells if the selected area is smaller than the area on the clipboard an error message appears and the paste is aborted If the selected area is larger than the area on the clipboard the cut or copied information is pasted in the upper left corner of the selected area Any text may be pasted into a free floating or line comment For rows if the selected number of rows is smaller than the number on the clipboard an error message appears and the paste is aborted If the selected number of rows is greater than the number on the clipboard the extra rows are deleted If only a cell is selected the rows are pasted above that cell To drag and drop cut in the VDT OF a Ae PS Open the Variable Declaration Table Select a variable s or cell s within single or multiple variables Position the mouse arrow over the selected variable or cell Press and hold the primary mouse button Move the variable or cell to the appropriate area To drop the selection release the mouse button If it is valid in the new location the selected variable or cell 1s removed from the original position and placed in the new position If it is not valid the drag and drop operation
47. an instruction using keyboard entry 1 Navigate to the cell where you want to insert an instruction 2 Press Shift Enter A combo box containing the list of all instructions will appear If the cell is empty simply press Enter OFDT TENTHS 3 To locate the function type the first few characters of the instruction name or use the arrow keys to scroll through the list 4 Press Enter to select the name and insert the instruction into your program Completing Address and Length Information Certain function blocks require you to supply a length for example a Move Instruction or an address for example a Timer Instruction for the function to operate correctly Functions which require this information will display inside the function block Perform the following steps to complete address or length information 1 Enter a function which requires address length or other information Notice the fields on the function block 2 Double click the function or select the function and press Enter The Function Properties dialog box will appear so that you can enter length and or address as appropriate GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 9 MOVE INT Function Properties Address Cancel Help 3 Type a length or address depending on the active parameter in the Function Properties dialog box Click OK when the information is complete 4 The function will display the length and or address sup
48. between carriers be sure to update the wiring information accordingly Configuring an NIU The default CPU is IC200CPUOO1 To replace the CPU with an NIU 1 Click the secondary mouse button and choose Replace CPU from the CSM 2 Select an NIU from the Module Catalog The Parameter Editor window for the selected NIU will appear 3 Review and modify NIU parameters in the Parameter Editor 4 When you are finished editing the NIU parameters click the window close button to close the Parameter Editor window 7 28 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 1 Click the secondary mouse button and choose Configure NIU Parameters from the CSM The Parameter Editor window for the NIU will appear To view or change NIU parameters 2 Review and modify NIU parameters in the Parameter Editor 3 When you are finished editing the NIU parameters click the window close button to close the Parameter Editor window Configuring the RIO Rack The general procedures for configuring carriers power supplies and modules in an RIO rack are the same as for a modular CPU rack For details see Rack Module Operations on page 7 20 Load Store Verify RIO Configuration For Genius and Profibus NIUs the Load Store and Verify operations require cable IC200CBLOO2 which is used to connect a COM port on your PC to the serial port on the left side of the VersaMax NIU For Ethernet NIUs these operations us
49. box will appear Mouse Select Double click the operand The variable combo box will appear Type a variable name reference address and scope optional into the edit box using the following guidelines Fields must be separated by commas Variable Hame Scope Reference Address Enter reference type and address in folowing tonmat 100R or R100 Global G Loca L Valid Characters Inchide 4 2 z 03 fonderscore A 1 gt The following example shows creating a variable p1l_count for parameter IN of the MOVE_INT Function VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D MOVE _ INT IM p1_count L fOfr Length R00011 G HOOO2O G R00100 L TMR_HUNC R00200 G Address R00Z55 G ey R00300 G HOO5SO0 G alarm low G Parts total G a 3 To accept the variable press the Enter key or use the mouse to click off the active cell Assigning Constants to Instruction Operands GFK 1670D Constants can be assigned to instruction operands To assign a constant using keyboard entry 1 Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the instruction operand where you want to assign a constant 2 Type the constant value Press the Enter key Rules on constants A constant s value may not exceed the capacity of the operand and must be entered in a format consistent with the instruction type Decimal efaul Chapter 5 Working in the Inst
50. creating a new folder Other options may be customized before opening a folder or after the folder is opened General Options VersaPro s default hardware configuration is the VersaMax PLC The default block language is Ladder Diagram To change the default configuration so that you can create programs and hardware configuration for the target devices or to customize display and editing options select the Tools menu and choose Options General Display Ladder Communications MPYLL Editors Default Block Language Detault Hardware Contiquration Ladder vers ablax r Syntax Check Rung Row Comments rege Brief Comments M Turn off warnings Full Comments Enable SNF Auto Export Filename File Lock Timeout PF M Use Folderlene Number of undoable modifications per window i I W Enable auto backup with a limit of f files coc Hee _ GFK 1670D Chapter I Introduction 1 5 1 6 Setting Block Language The default language is Ladder Diagram To change the default block language to Instruction List select the General tab Click the Default Block Language and select Instruction List Changing Hardware Configuration default VersaPro s default hardware platform is the VersaMax PLC You can create programs and hardware configuration for Series 90 70 Series 90 30 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro and Series 90 Micro PLCs To change the default hardware configuration select the General tab and set t
51. data rates up to 19 2 Kbps as follows RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum cable length RS 422 RS 422 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum length Must not exceed the maximum RS 422 Common Mode specification of 7V to 7V Isolation at the remote end may be used to reduce or eliminate Common Mode voltages At shorter distances under 50 feet 15 meters almost any twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cable will work as long as the wire pairs are connected correctly When using RS 422 RS 422 the twisted pairs should be matched so that both transmit signals make up one twisted pair and both receive signals make up the other twisted pair If this is ignored cross talk resulting from the mismatching will affect the performance of the communications system When routing communication cables outdoors transient suppression devices can be used to reduce the possibility of damage due to lightning or static discharge Care should be exercised to ensure that all connected devices are grounded to a common point Failure to do so could result in damage to the equipment GFK 1670D Appendix B Serial Connections B 3 PLC Serial Port The Series 90 and VersaMax PLC serial port is compatible with RS 422 An RS 232 to RS 422 converter is required to interface to systems that provide RS 232 compatible interfaces The PLC RS 422 serial port provides the physical connection for SNP communication The figure below shows the serial port orientation and connector
52. defined in the Produced Exchanges tab of the Ethernet Global Data dialog box e Local Producer By default uses the IP address of the network interface card closest to the CPU of PLC A The Local Producer can be changed by the user e Exchange ID Identifies the packet of data that will be sent e Net Address Name The name assigned to the network adapter within this PLC system that will be producing the exchange e Consumer Type Specifies how the consuming device will be identified by name IP address or group ID For this example the consuming PLC 1s identified by its Local Producer IP Address e Consumer Address The Local Producer IP Address assigned to PLC B e Send Type Defines when the exchange will be transmitted This field is fixed at Always e Producer Period PLC A will produce the data every 50 milliseconds e Reply Rate Not used e Status Word A reference address for status memory location where the status word is stored The status word can signify when an error has occurred Details of Consuming PLC B The details of the exchange that PLC B consumes are defined in the Consumed Exchanges tab of the Ethernet Global Data dialog box e Local Producer Uses the IP address of the network interface card closest to the CPU of PLC B e Exchange ID Identifies the packet of data that will be received e Net Address Name The name assigned to the network adapter within this PLC system that will be consuming the ex
53. e Click the IP Address field and type the IP address of the Ethernet controller then click the OK button Name Resolution and Routing Table Configuration CPU364 and CMM742 The CPU364 supports the Routing Table feature an advanced tool for configuring communications between PLCs The Routing Table should not be configured without assistance from a network administrator A Routing Table should only be configured when more than one gateway is to be configured 7 34 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Definitions of routing table terms Destination Subnet ID The destination subnet of the data to be routed is evaluated against this subnet ID A match same subnets causes the data to be routed to the next hop IP address Destination Subnet Mask The mask associated with the destination subnet under evaluation Next Hop IP Address The IP address where the data should be sent next to progress toward its final destination Cost This field is reserved Default value is 1 Accessing the Routing Table Configuration From Hardware Configuration go to the Edit menu choose Rack Operations and select Name Resolution and Routing or click the right mouse button and choose Name Resolution and Routing from the shortcut menu The Name Resolution and Routing Tables dialog box will display In the Name Resolution and Routing Tables dialog box click the Routing tab Click the Add Entry button In t
54. e a S E a a D e e fi e tat A S paws e h poos o o oa e pom p h pome j 2 VDT Tabs S Ciekatabtovew a h foom S oea fe ae Ma p pom ote e dp p pom bo v wet af Pos ll 6 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Variable Table Field Descriptions GFK 1670D This section describes the fields which are included when defining a variable Name In variable programming names are assigned to memory addresses You can assign a logical name or let the reference address match the variable name If you do not assign a name for the variable the reference address is automatically used as aname A variable name can be no longer than 31 characters and may only consist of the characters A Z a z 0 9 _ lt gt Variable names must start with a letter or underscore _ For a list of reserved words see page 6 4 Type Each variable must be assigned a data type describing how the variable is to be used in the program VersaPro allows you to assign a variable a Bit Byte or Word data type Length The Length field specifies the amount of data that a variable is to use For word data type length specifies the number of words For Byte data type the it specifies the number of bytes For bit data type the length must be 1 The Data Length defines the amount of Stored Value Data that is specified for a variable Address A reference address links a variable with a physical loca
55. error message appears informing you of the maximum value and the fact that it has been exceeded Monitoring within an RVT can not take place until all offsets are determined to be within the limits of the PLC e Ifan offset is valid but data is not available a O displays If the offset is not valid the cell remains blank GFK 1670D Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 9 Modifying Information in a View Table VersaPro allows you to edit the variables contained in a View Table by changing the Name of a variable Changing the Name in a View Table selects a different variable from the VDT and replaces the existing variable in the View Table True changes to a Name must be made in the VDT To write a value to a reference select the cell corresponding to the reference in the VVT or RVT and type the new value You can also place the view table in edit mode by double clicking in the cell pressing F10 or choosing Write from the PLC menu 5 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Editing Operations in View Tables Using cut copy paste in a VVT Open the VVT from which you wish to cut a variable entry or entries Select at least one cell within each row that you wish to cut En Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu click the Cut or Copy button or press Ctrl X to cut or Ctrl C to copy All rows entirely selected are removed from the VVT and placed on the clipboard in Versa
56. eth ladcharz lt Back Herts Finish Cancel 2 Click the Next button The next screen of the New Folder Wizard will appear 3 Click the Import Logicmaster 90 button then click the Browse button for the From field and in the Browse dialog box that appears locate the Logicmaster 90 folder upon which you wish upon which you wish to base this new folder 4 Click Finish The content of the Logicmaster 90 folder 1s imported into the new folder The logic is checked for correct syntax e If any syntax errors are found they are reported in the Information Window and the process is aborted The new folder is not created e If no syntax errors are found the folder is populated with the logic and hardware configuration from the Logicmaster 90 folder Importing Logicmaster Folders Earlier than Release 6 0 If you have a Logicmaster 90 70 folder created before release 6 of Logicmaster you should use the following procedure to import your Logicmaster folders into VersaPro 1 Open Logicmaster 90 70 release 6 or later 2 Press F1 to enter programming mode and select any folder 3 Press F8 Program Folder Functions and then F1 Select Create a Program Folder GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 7 4 Select the folder to be imported into VersaPro and press Ctrl T You will see the message Converting old logic files to new format please wait followed by File conversion complete press any key to continue 5 I
57. execution You can also monitor multiple blocks simultaneously In order to monitor values online the logic must be running on the PLC and VersaPro must be logically connected to the PLC Turning Monitoring On and Off 1 Connect to the PLC whose executing logic you wish to monitor Make sure that the logic in the current folder is equal to that on the PLC Choose Monitor from the View menu a ae From the submenu that appears choose Active Window or All to determine whether elements in only the active window or all windows should be updated in real time If you choose Active Window the active window is updated with data from logic execution If you choose All all active windows are updated with data from logic execution e IL LD VVT and RVT are the only active windows that can be monitored e A single active window updates at roughly 10 times a second over a TCP IP connection e When Al is selected and more than one window is open the active window always updates more often than the others However each additional open window slows this active window s updating speed by roughly 1 time per second e Once monitoring has been turned on it remains on until specifically turned off 5 To turn monitoring off choose Monitoring from the View menu 6 From the submenu that appears choose Off Note In order to view real time updates logic needs to be executing If you stop executing logic the latest values remain
58. expressions 5 17 New Reference View Table 8 4 New Variable View Table Next reference assignment 7 7 NIU configuring 7 28 O Objects inserting 3 7 Online use tables creating Online viewing view tables Opening blocks Operand column IL editor 5 2 Operators valid in IL editor 5 9 Options automatic folder backup communications Motion Program Local Logic 9 2 Motion Local Logic VersaPro 1 5 Override reference reference view tables 8 14 Overrides searching for 10 29 Overwrite warning 1 10 Index 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 p Parameter Editor editing tips error color using Parameter view tabbed spreadsheet 7 7 Passwords folder 2 19 Paste LD editor 4 17 PLC configuring 7 8J 7 19 7 43 run stop mode 10 26 PLC communication connecting direct serial port connection PLC Fault Table 11 1 PLC status information Point to point RS 232 connections B 6 Power supply series 90 30 90 70 7 9 Power Supply Series 90 30 configuring 7 9 Power Supply VersaMax configuring 7 22 Power Supply Bases VersaMax AEn Power Supply Booster Bases configuring 7 21 Printing custom header footer 2 25 Hardware Configuration 7 52 reports from VersaPro 2 23 Program overwrite warning Properties blocks folder function 4 9 4 10 Pulse train output Series 90 Micro 7 46
59. from the Variable Declaration Table to the function block parameter Note Declaration of variables with overlaps will result in conflicts when you attempt to Store the stored values to the PLC In order to resolve these conflicts you must use the VDT to relocate variables so that they do not overlap For example a variable at R8 with length 3 and a variable at R10 of length 2 have an overlap at R10 To assign an existing variable using keyboard entry 1 Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the parameter where you want to assign a variable 2 Type or select the variable as follows e To select a variable from the list of defined variables press Enter The variable combo box will appear Use the up and down arrow keys to display the variables When you find the variable you want to use press Enter to accept e To enter a variable by name simply type the variable name Press Enter to accept GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 11 4 12 To assign an existing variable using the mouse 1 Double click on the parameter cell where you want to assign a variable The variable combo box will appear 2 To expand the variable list click the arrow on the combo box Use the slide control to scroll up and down through the list 3 Select the variable from the list Press Enter or click outside the parameter cell area to accept To create a new variable for a function block parameter 1 Select the parameter cel
60. go to the Tools menu in the VersaPro window and select Options On the General tab change the Default Hardware Configuration to the type that you will be using Printing Hardware Configuration You can print your Rack configuration by going to the File menu and choosing Print To set print options click the Range button in the Print dialog box The following print options are available You can choose to print hardware configuration information for the entire rack or for a range of modules selected by rack slot You can select to print overview or detail for the configuration d d d Overview Prints the Rack as shown on the screen Detail Prints the parameter information for each module in the Rack Ethernet Global Data If your CPU is configured to participate in EGD exchanges select this box to print EGD configuration for the CPU Reference Details Prints a table showing start and end memory locations rack slot addresses and other reference data Name Resolution For Series 90 30 CPU364 configurations using Name Resolution check this box to print the Name Resolution configuration information If you want to change your target printer or paper size or orientation click the Setup button in the Print dialog box 7 52 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter Using Reference and Variable View Tables S GFK 1670D VersaPro provides two View Tables for monitoring the
61. granted a 4 day tral license To transter out a license VersaPro must already be installed on the target system when ready follow in sequence the steps below 1 Register a floppy for transter in by running Register Now on the unlicensed system selecting Transfer In License inserting a formatted floppy and selecting Register Floppy for Transfer ln Occur on the unlicensed system 2 Transher out the license to floppy by inserting the registered floppy into this system and selecting Transter License Out to Floppy Transter License Out by Floppy 3 Transter in the license from floppy by inserting the registered floppy into the Unlicensed system and selecting Transfer License In from Floppy Occurs on the Unlicensed system C 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Since we are transferring via a floppy disk insert the registered floppy disk into the floppy and click the OK button Select Path for License Transfer Out Choose the path for license transter Path lay Browse Cancel You should see one of the following two messages reflecting a successful license transfer out Click the OK button Message 1 This message appears when the licensed machine carries only one license This is the more common of the two Since the machine s only license is transferred out a 4 day trial license is assigned to the machine Information x Th
62. in the Options dialog box Singlerow Tab Displays the Parameter Editor window in a tabbed format If you resize the window so that it is too narrow to display all the tabs a scroll bar is provided to access tabs that are not visible Multirow Tab Displays the Parameter Editor window in a tabbed format If you resize the window so that it is too narrow to display the tabs in a single row the tabs will be stacked Spreadsheet Displays the Parameter Editor window in a spreadsheet format Tab headings are displayed in bold underlined text Error Status Displays the Parameter Editor Error List which identifies parameter errors and allows you to correct them before closing the window This option is available only when the current Parameter Editor window contains errors Tools Menu Hardware Configuration Displays the PLC Configuration Data in a tabbed dialog allowing for both text and Data View binary formatted presentation of the contained information Options Displays an Options dialog which allows you to adjust certain application behavior such as Log size and Parameter Editor view Communications Setup Opens the CCU Allows you to define communications parameters Load Store Verify If an NIU is configured in the rack system allows you to load store verify or clear the hardware configuration A 16 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Redundancy Menu Wizard Opens the Redundancy W
63. integrated with the Series 90 30 PLC logic solving and communications functions VersaPro provides the following capabilities e DSM314 Configuration Allows you to select module settings and default operational parameters using SAHWC e Motion Editor Used to create and modify Motion programs A Motion program consists of a series of motion command statements that are stored to and executed in the DSM314 Up to 10 Motion programs and 40 subroutines are allowed e Local Logic Editor Used to create and modify Local Logic programs which run synchronously with the Motion program independently of the PLC s CPU scan This allows the DSM314 to interact much more quickly with motion I O signals than if the logic for these signals was handled in the main ladder program running in the PLC e Cam Editor A separately installed utility used to create edit and manage Cam profiles A Cam profile specifies the response of a slave servo follower to a master position index and is referenced by name in the associated Motion program A Cam block is downloaded to the DSM314 module via the PLC by specifying the Cam block name in the DSM314 hardware configuration The Motion Local Logic and Cam editors are accessed from the Folder Browser Motion Local Logic and Cam blocks can be dragged cut copied etc within the Folder Browser the same as other program blocks as described in chapter 3 Once created and saved Motion Local Logic and Cam programs b
64. is cancelled To drag and drop copy in the VDT 6 10 St oes i a Open the Variable Declaration Table Select a variable s or cell s within single or multiple variables Position the mouse over the selected variable or cell Press and hold the Ctrl key Press and hold down the primary mouse button Move the variable or cell to the appropriate area To drop the selection release the mouse button If it 1s valid in the new location the selected variable or cell is copied from the original position and placed in the new position If it is not valid the drag and drop operation is cancelled VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D B Details on Dragging and Dropping in the VDT e Changes to values that occur through Dragging and Dropping will also appear on any other affected table s or editors e Drag and drop of variables is only available on the same VDT tab e When a selection spans more than one variable row validation is performed If any cell in the selected area is invalid in its new location the entire drag and drop operation is cancelled e You cannot cut the following cells unless the entire row is selected Type Length Scope Retentive Override e Ifa selection is dropped that would go beyond the last row of the VDT new rows are created to accommodate the drop e When a selection is dropped it overwrites the existing cells e VersaPro does not allow dragging and droppin
65. menu item is not available for 90 30 systems Configure Receiver Parameters Displays the power consumption tab for the VersaMax expansion rack receiver which has no configurable parameters This menu item is available only when the receiver unit located in the first slot of the expansion rack is selected A 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Copy Redundant Bus For a 90 70 rack configuration Available when the selected module is a Redundant GBC with Internal Pairing Copies a redundant bus configuration from a Source bus to a Destination bus using the default settings for this operation Set all GBC s SBA For a 90 70 rack configuration Allows you to set the Serial Bus Address SBA for all GBC modules in the rack system Edit menu Module Operations Submenu Configure Parameters Displays the Module Parameter Dialog which allows for the editing of the configuration Ctrl E parameters for the selected Module Add Module Displays the Module Selection Dialog which allows for the selection and configuration of a new Module in the selected empty rack slot or Carrier Base in a VersaMax modular system Replace Module Displays the Module Selection Dialog which allows for the selection and configuration of a replacement Module for the selected Module Delete Module Deletes the selected Module from the Rack system Expand Bus For a 90 70 rack configuration that contains a BEM731 GBC
66. name Note that Find by Name only searches for Global and System variables All other Search By categories will search for Local as well as Global and System variables Search For Sets the address block name instruction or variable name to be used in the search Blocks Establishes the scope of the search Choose All blocks or Selected blocks searches all blocks currently selected in the Folder Browser Outputs Only Limits the scope of the search to references used as outputs only coils To limit the search to outputs only check this box Implicit Addresses Allows you to locate logic where an address is used but is not referenced explicitly in the function block To search for implicit addresses check this box The search is performed and the results of the search appear in the Information Window Found items are listed by block rung or row and instruction Double clicking an item in the Information window opens the appropriate block and selects the matching element Using Search and Replace VersaPro allows you to search for and replace elements in block logic You can search for variable names reference addresses and other elements in block logic and replace the search item with a new name or address Note Search and Replace only works on a individual block by block basis This feature does not operate across the entire program Follow the steps below to use the Find Replace feature 1 Open the block you want to
67. on the Browse button opposite the Location field Enter a folder description in the Folder Description field You may enter up to 64 characters This field is optional Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 9 2 Click the Next button The next screen of the New Folder Wizard will appear Choose One C Empty Folder Default Based on Existing YersaPro Folder Import Logicmaster 90 i ie Import Control v Include SNF is Bie hFolders bid 614 di fax bld1 61 Back ext Finish Cancel 3 Click the Import Control button then click the Browse button of the From field and in the Browse dialog box that appears locate the Control folder upon which you wish to base this new folder Note Only Control folders with f3x and f2k extensions may be imported Note Your Control folder must be successfully built in Control before importing and the hardware configuration must also have been built in Control 4 If you are importing variables from Control select the Include SNF checkbox then click the Browse button and in the Browse dialog box that appears locate the SNF file that is associated with the Control file to be imported This field is optional Note When importing a Control folder in order to add variable nicknames the SNF shared name format file associated with the folder to be imported must first be exported from the Control folder using Control Refer to the Control online help for details on
68. operands Integer Real Real with exponents Base 16 16 xxxx Base 8 8 xxx and Binary 2 xxxxxxxx To use a Constant of 1 or 0 for an operand used with a Boolean operator the ALW_ON 1 or TRUE and ALW_OFF 0 or FALSE System variables must be used GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 1 Functions Functions are invoked using formal input lists Functions are also unconditionally executed regardless of the result of a previous instruction Functions usually place their result in the Accumulator The type of the accumulator is also usually determined by the function AddResultGti00 SQRT INT Inputil gt 100 SQRT INT IH Inputi Input to Function call GT 100 oT BOOL AddResultGt1io00 Set to TRUE if result greater than 100 Function Blocks Function Blocks are also invoked using formal input lists Function Blocks are also unconditionally executed regardless of the result of a previous instruction Function Blocks usually place their result in the Accumulator The type of the accumulator is also usually determined by the function block The Address of a Function Block is an input parameter UPCTR Address SROOO R SHOO01 PY 1 5 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D PLC Built in Functions and Function Blocks The following PLC Built in Functions and Function Blocks can be called by the IL program The resulting Accumulator s
69. rack contains a non isolated Power Supply and Receiver Integrated Unit IC200ERMO002 The power supply is not configured unless the Receiver unit is active The default power supply in the expansion rack will be the same as the main rack s power supply Replacing the main rack s primary power supply will not affect the expansion rack s primary power supply Multiple Remote Rack Allows you to configure up to seven Expansion racks seven Rack tabs are always shown The Main VersaMax rack contains a Transmitter IC200ETMO0O1 The Non Isolated Receiver IC200ERMO002 which is configured by default can be replaced by an Isolated Receiver IC200ERMO01 The Transmitter and Receiver modules cannot be added from the module catalog The only way to add these modules to a rack configuration is to choose the appropriate configuration type Also you cannot delete them from a rack configuration except by changing the rack configuration type Note If a single ended receiver is configured and an expansion transmitter is present a fatal expansion transmitter mismatch fault will be generated This fault will also be generated if a differential transmitter and receivers is configured and no expansion transmitter 1s physically present In these cases no faults will be generated for individual modules in the expansion racks The CPU detects the presence or absence of receiver modules connected through the expansion bus and compares the physical conf
70. ready to run your licensed VersaPro product information C 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Appendix VersaPro Keyboard Quick Reference Guide D The quick reference card on the next page contains a listing of keyboard shortcuts for VersaPro commands as well as other programming tips GFK 1670D D 1 D 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Cut here CTRL ALT V ALT F4 CTRL ALT R SHIFT F6 ALT 0 ALT 1 ALT 2 ALT 3 ALT 6 ALT F6 ALT F7 gt ALT F8 ALT F9 CTRL T CTRL E CTRL TAB CTRL SHIFT TAB CTRL O CTRL SHIFT A F8 CTRL F8 CTRL B ALT 5 gt ALT F10 CTRL F7 F7 ALT 4 VersaPro Programming Software Quick Reference To launch exit VersaPro Launch VersaPro from Windows Bring VersaPro into focus Exit VersaPro Launch Remote IO Manager Stand Alone Hardware Config from Windows Bring Remote I O Manager into focus To modify the VersaPro workspace F6 Move focus to next block dockable window Move focus to previous block dockable window Show or hide the status bar Show or hide the Folder Browser Show or hide the Information Window Show or hide the Variable Declaration Table Show or hide the Local Logic Variable Table Arrange windows so they overlap Arrange windows as horizontal non overlapping tiles A
71. real time values and states of elements in the PLC e The Variable View Table allows you to group important variables into a window for online viewing e The Reference View Tables allows you to group important references into a window for online viewing Multiple View Tables may be open at once Chapter Contents e Overview of Reference View Tables RVT and Variable View Tables VVT e Information on creating and managing data in the view tables 8 1 Variable View Tables Overview Variable View Tables VVTs allow you to monitor the states of variables A folder may have zero or more mixed type VVTs VVTs and VVT entries can be cut and copied and dragged and dropped between folders An example of a VVT is shown below Scope Shows variable scope Global or Local block Address Displays PLC reference address for each variable Name Displays variable name which may be user defined or match the Reference Address Value Displays PLC online value if you are connected to the PLC with logic equal and montonng active a Ronz Rogie Globa o pewni ee A1005 samos Globa mf Only the Name column may be edited All other columns are read only The Value column is blank until the Folder is on line and equal The value cell displays REE for variables that have no assigned reference address If the cell is too narrow to display the online value
72. sssccssssccsssccssssccssscccsssceessees 11 1 Working with the PLC and I O Fault Tables eens 11 2 Viewing the PLC and I O Fault Tables ecccceeeeeeeees 11 2 Viewing Fault Details ccccsecccescccseecceeeccceesceeeseesenseeeeseens 11 3 SOME EAU eaaa a a a 11 4 Saving Fault InfOrManON sascisehaisrsscvaeanavakadeadeowaracdsabadarieaaraadeasaloaies 11 4 Canne he Pauk 1 ables cnntotinncpduanwluotntenpdnct vohtemidtneevelneas 11 5 Openings Other Fault Tables iseni a Ait 11 5 Chans GF OMG air aan a a e a e 11 6 Printime Fault Tales prcso a 11 6 VersaPro Menus and Toolbars cccccssssccsssssccsssssccssssccssessoes A 1 VersaPro Menis siditiescessidvasiascivessssicessdiesteteccdsieeetasdinenesaeceasideceesacs A 1 File Men iiss oo ia e R EE A 1 File Menu New Submenu cc cece cecececececcececccecscececesescececeens A 2 PEN Deo a a sian eat caioees A 2 Edit Properties SUDMCNU ecca a a A 3 NOW VISTO as acstrcte Artin an casein tansy ceased asin deat ncn eonnaeaereanceineys A 3 iTS te UG M aes ciatrc ech atateh te silts cha a eases ea tale sedans omen damien A 4 Polder Momsena A 4 PEC MICU 5555 saa cinyehan A Aceon ences A 5 TOOTS VIC Mircea anni A 6 Window MICO scoisves oie cai ceeiviadeeid ct E oda elas A 6 Help Ment rerai e a A 7 VersaPro ToolNar rS eanan E TEENE aen A 8 Standard FOO DAL ossis ene eea eens iaa eee ea A 8 ladder TOO Dar vacie E A A 9 View POODLE reata n A 10 Contents XV Contents Appendix B
73. the cell but not the text is highlighted the Enter key selects the cell for editing If the current cell has been selected for editing the Enter key submits the contents of the cell for row validation and selects the cell below the current one Selects or unselects the current cell for editing Shift Arrow Keys If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the Shift Arrow keys select the current cell and moves the selection one cell in the direction of the arrow key If the current cell has been selected for editing the keys select the current character and moves the selection one character in the direction of the arrow key If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the Home key selects the first cell in the current row If the current cell has been selected for editing the Home key moves the cursor to the left of the first character in the cell 6 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D End If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the End key selects the last cell in the current row If the current cell has been selected for editing the End key moves the cursor to the right of the last character in the cell Selects the first cell in the first row Ctrl End Selects the first cell in the last row Tab
74. to Chapter 9 of the VersaMax Micro PLCs and Nano PLCs User s Manual GFK 1645 7 44 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Configuring Series 90 Micro PLCs A Series 90 Micro PLC is a self contained module that provides CPU I O and HSC PWM PTO functions The 23 and 28 point Micro PLCs support up to four optional Expansion Units that provide I O functions only The compact lightweight units are designed for 35mm DIN rail or panel mounting The sample system shown below has a main module required and one Expansion Unit ik S90Micro Kaun DOOD DADUA BORDER OORRRH BAGO MATADAN UDROOS en DEXON i AL oo R 12 B B I TECCETT COET ee ICB93UEX01 17012 8 IN 6 OUT ACHUE 011 DCEO 2V DC Relay Local Rack Not saved 2 Rack Module Operations GFK 1670D To replace a main module IC693UDR005 010 is the default select Replace Module or Replace CPU from the context sensitive menu or select Replace CPU from the Edit Rack Operations submenu To add an Expansion Unit to the system select Add Module from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu The Expansion Unit is added to the end of the chain To replace an Expansion Unit select the Expansion Unit and choose Replace Module from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu To remove an Expansion Unit from the system select Delete Module from the context
75. user documents and spreadsheets VersaPro allows you to have only one folder open at a time However you can have multiple instances of VersaPro running on your PC Chapter Contents This chapter describes how to create and manage folders using the VersaPro software GFK 1670D Creating a new folder Creating an empty folder Creating a folder based on an existing VersaPro folder Creating a new folder importing logic from a Logicmaster 90 folder Creating a new folder importing logic from Control Working with existing folders opening saving closing deleting Overview of the folder browser view Backing up and Restoring folders Protecting folders Changing folder properties Inserting blocks and objects Printing folder logic 2 1 Creating and Opening VersaPro Folders Creating a New Folder VersaPro provides several options when creating a new folder You can create an empty folder or create a new folder based on an existing VersaPro folder VersaPro also provides an option for you to create a folder by importing content from Logicmaster 90 Series 90 30 Series 90 70 or Series 90 Micro folders or Control Series 90 30 Series 90 70 or VersaMax folders To create a new empty folder The default language for new folders is Ladder Diagram The default hardware configuration is VersaMax If you want to change the default language or target hardware for your new folder select the Tools menu and choose Opti
76. will need to re import the C blocks into Logicmaster 90 70 release 6 or greater before importing the folder into VersaPro The Ctrl T operation does not update C blocks When a folder contains a locked block 2 8 You may import a Logicmaster 90 or Control folder or load a folder from a PLC containing a locked protected block The following will occur e When a folder containing a locked block is imported from Logicmaster 90 or Control the block name type and language are retained but the block contains no contents e When a protected block is loaded from a PLC an empty block is created The Folder Browser displays an icon for the block VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D To create a new folder importing logic from a Control folder You can import VersaMax F2K and Series 90 30 F3X folders from Control To create a new folder based on an existing Control folder launch VersaPro and perform the following steps 1 Click the New Folder button P choose New Folder from the File menu or press Ctrl N The New Folder Wizard will appear 2 Back Finish Cancel Folder Hame emic Location C Program Files GE Fanuc Autom Folder Description VersaPro folder for Wersah ax PLCs Default langauge LD In the Folder Name field type a name for the new folder A folder name is If you want to save the new folder to a location different from the default click
77. you paste LD logic to applications other than VersaPro You can however copy ladder logic as a bitmap image You can paste a variable from the VDT to the LD Editor This section describes the different ways you can perform cut copy paste and drag and drop in the LD Editor window To cut or copy in the LD Editor 1 Open the LD block you want to edit Select rung s or cell s you want to copy or cut 2 Choose C Copy from the Edit or right mouse menu click the Cut or the Copy button on the Standard toolbar or press Ctrl C to Copy or Ctrl X to Cut The selected information is cut or copied to the Clipboard To cut or copy in the LD Editor using Drag and Drop 1 Open the LD block you want to edit Select rung s or cell s you want to copy or cut 2 To Cut using drag and drop position the mouse arrow over the selected logic press down and hold down the primary mouse button To Copy using drag and drop position the mouse arrow over the selected logic press and hold the CTRL key then press and hold the primary mouse button 3 Move the logic to the appropriate area To drop the selection release the mouse button and or the Ctrl key To copy as a bitmap in the LD Editor 1 Open the LD block you want to edit Select rung s or cell s you want to copy 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Copy As gt Bitmap 3 The selected information is copied to the Clipboard as a bitmap image This image may be pasted int
78. 2 Function DB IOCKS arnon N E A TA 5 12 PLC Built in Functions and Function BloCKS eeeeeeeeen 5 13 Nesting of Boolean Expressions sssesssesssesssesssersserssersserssersseee 5 17 Um ENO ac E enemas 5 18 Defining Temporary Variables seiwenisroseiaviaieraccreiebieaueeebaicherttee ace 5 19 Error CHECKING sa sas2ctssannesaisabadetsraeneaaiabadatinacaeaaivasadatanacensakeasadediie 5 19 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 6 GFK 1670D Contents Working with the Variable Declaration Table cssssssees 6 1 Overview of the Variable Declaration Table cccssssccsseses 6 2 Variable Table Field DeseripriOnsxicissicciebasiaiatetieteiaetsitiaitietaatess 6 3 Reserved Words acsee ana e E E 6 4 Creating and Modifying Variables seessseoseecssecsseossecsseosseesseoo 6 5 To create a new variable or modify an existing variable in the VDT 6 5 Navigating in the VDT eessesssecssecssecsseesseosseosseosseesseesssesssesssessoe 6 6 Navigating Using the Mouse or Keyboard cccccccccseecceeeeeceeseeeeneeeaeseeseneeeses 6 6 Locating a Variable using the Go To Variable Dialog BOX ccceeeceeeeeeeees 6 7 Using Cut Copy Paste and Drag and Drop in the VDT 6 8 To cut copy and paste in the Variable Declaration Table ccceeecceeeeeee ee 6 8 Details on Cutting and Copyine iidesseccst onde Beeds cadena
79. 3 Click the Store button The programming software will automatically connect to the NIU Note If you attempt to store a hardware configuration to an NIU that does not match the type selected in the configuration an error message will appear and the operation will be stopped 7 30 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Loading RIO Configuration To load configuration data from the Rack System 1 Choose Load Store Verify in the Tools menu 2 In the Load Store Verify Hardware Configuration dialog box select a Device and a Port 3 Click the Load button The programming software will automatically connect to the NIU Note If you attempt to load a hardware configuration from an NIU that does not match the type selected in the configuration an error message will appear and the operation will be stopped VersaMax Modules with Shared IDs When the configuration is loaded from a rack system HWC uses the hardware module ID to determine the correct module catalog number and description However some VersaMax modules share the same module IDs When a VersaMax rack system containing these modules is auto configured and the configuration is loaded an incorrect catalog number and description may be displayed You will need to select the correct module from the modules catalog and store it to the rack system After storing the configuration you will be able to load the configuration properly The followin
80. 31 loads as IC200MDL329 IC200MDD844 loads as IC200MDD842 IC200MDL141 loads as IC200MDL140 GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 27 Configuring a VersaMax Remote I O Rack A VersaMax Remote I O RIO rack consists of a network interface unit NIU and supported I O modules Three types of NIUs are available Genius GNIU Profibus PNIU and Ethernet ENIU All VersaMax I O modules are supported except IC200BEMO002 and IC200BEM103 When you enter Hardware Configuration for VersaMax equipment folders the default view is the Rack Main The power supply PWROO1 and CPU CPU001 are in the default configuration To configure a Remote I O rack you must replace the CPU with an NIU and configure the NIU parameters As in a VersaMax rack system with a CPU the RIO rack system is built by selecting carriers into which I O communications and power supply modules are added The default VersaMax rack system has a main rack Multiple power supplies are supported on the main rack as required by the modules you need to add into your rack system The RIO supports two types of expansion networks Local Single Rack and Multiple Remote Rack The Multiple Remote Rack configuration allows up to seven expansion racks Multiple power supplies can be used in expansion racks In the physical hardware field wiring is connected to the module carriers instead of the modules HWC displays module wiring in the Module Parameters If you move a module
81. 34 28 8 V 32 14 4 Model MI4EW 2310 USRobotics 56K 10 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Configure the PLC 1 In HWC configure the desired CPU with the desired data rate no parity 1 stop bit and a modem turnaround time of 1 if necessary Jii Example 0 1 IC693CPU364 settings Scan Memory Power Consumption Ethernet RS 232 Port Station Manager FiS 232 Port EM 4 gt Parameters Values a Checksum Words g Data Rate bps 149200 Parity Odd stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time 01 Sec C 0 Idle Time Sect 10 Timer Faults Disabled SNF ID Key owitch Run Stop Disabled Memory Protect Disabled Ignore Fatal Faults Disabled Series 90 30 CPU Model 364 2 Store this configuration to the PLC Configure a Modem in Windows The programmer s PC port must be set up through the Windows operating system Select Start Settings Control Panel and then select the Modems icon The Modems Properties dialog box will appear The Modem Properties should be set to match the PLC s configuration for number of bits parity and stop bits 1 From the Start menu select Settings and Control Panel then double click the Modems icon 2 In the Modems Properties dialog box click the Add button and install a standard modem The Standard Modem uses a generic communications and configuration driver GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 13 10 14 Modems Propert
82. 4 20 Converting Logic from 90 70 to 90 30 VersaMakx seccceeeees 4 21 Tips for Converting 90 70 Logic to 90 30 Logic sesesssensseesseesssesssersssesssers 4 21 Issues in Logic Converted from 90 70 to 90 30 cccccecccseeecceseeeeeseeeeeeeeseneees 4 23 Differences in Language Capability in VersaPro 90 70 vs 90 DEN aN ea a a a a a 4 24 TSHrUCtION SEP DiTENCE Serani a N 4 24 Omer Than euae Dierenees isesi a te 4 25 Working in the Instruction List Editor cccccsssccssssscccssssees 5 1 Overview of the Instruction List Editor cece cecceseceecceeceeceees 5 2 Customizing the IEditor Display ereiil aa a dene 5 3 Entering Instructions and Instruction Parameters sss00 5 4 SEIECHNS Ee INSU HONG eresia E A E Mharenddgewerante 5 4 Completing Address and Length Information cccccccseseecseseeeeeeceeeeeeseneeees 5 5 Completing Instruction Parameters cccceccccseeeceeeeceaeseeeeeneeeseseeeenseeseeeeeeeneees 5 5 Assigning Variables to Instruction Operands ccccccescccseeecceeeceeeeeeeeeneeeneneeeaes 5 5 Assigning Constants to Instruction Operands cccseeecceeeeceeeseceeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 5 7 Using Cut Copy Paste and Delete in the IL Editor 0 cceececneseeeeneeeeees 5 8 Instruction List Operation sccccsssccsssccsssccssssccssscccsssccssssoess 5 9 COn AES ane trades vat eared aca aan eran aa aes haat 5 11 FON CLOG S A 5 1
83. 670D Customizing View Table Display You can customize font selection and color for VVTs and RVTs Perform the following steps to customize the display 4 From the Folder Browser click the Tools menu and select Options The Options dialog box will appear Select the Display tab Animate 5 You can change the font selection and change the color used for the display of online values e To modify the settings for the RVT set the Category to RVT and make the desired changes Click OK to accept e To modify the settings for the VVT set the Category to VVT and make the desired changes Click OK to accept GFK 1670D Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 5 Changing Reference View Table Display Format Your selections of Byte Word or Dword governs how much data is displayed in each cell Formatting for an RVT occurs on a table not a row basis Perform these steps to change the display format for a RVT 1 Open the RVT 2 Select the View menu and choose Format View Table The Format Display dialog box will appear Format Display ES Display Type Display Format Unsigned Decimal Divord signed Decimal Cancel Ps Aglaia yi ole detale 3 Select the Grouping and Display Format which suits your application needs e Grouping Field O Byte each cell contains 8 bits O Word each cell contains 16 bits O Dword each cell contains 32 bits e Display Format Binary Hex Octal Unsigned Decimal Signed
84. Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 3 Creating New Reference and Variable View Tables New Variable View Tables and Reference View Tables are created from the folder browser CSM or the File menu You can have multiple view tables in your folder To create a new Reference View Table 1 From the Folder Browser click the right mouse button and choose New View Table Reference View Table or select the File menu and choose New View Table Reference View Table The New Reference View Table dialog box will appear Hew Reference Yiew Table E4 Hame Cancel 2 Enter a name for the RVT Click OK to accept 3 The new RVT is created and displays in the folder window The new RVT icon is added to the Folder Browser with the RVT name Note Offsets columns are not populated until you are connected to the PLC and have enabled Monitoring To create a Variable View Table 1 From the Folder Browser click the right mouse button and choose New View Table Variable View Table or select the File menu and choose New View Table Variable View Table The New Variable View Table dialog box will appear Hew Yanable View Table E4 Hame Cancel it 2 Enter a name for the VVT Click OK to accept 3 The new VVT is created and displays in the folder window The new VVT icon is added to the Folder Browser with the VVT name 8 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1
85. Click the OK button or press Enter to print Printing Logic Variable Declaration Table or Information Window Contents With the window you want to print selected choose Print from the File menu click the Print button al or press Ctrl P The Print dialog box appears 1 In the Printer group use the drop down list to choose the printer that you want to use to print the report You can also view or alter Printer Properties by clicking the Properties button or choose to print to file by clicking in the Print to file checkbox 2 Inthe Print range group determine whether the current selection a certain range of Rows Rungs or Tabs or All items should be printed in the report 3 Inthe Copies group determine the number of copies that you want to print by entering it manually or by using the arrow buttons to the right of the field 4 Click OK to print or Cancel to close the dialog box without printing Custom Header Footer Formatting GFK 1670D You can specify custom header and footers for printed reports and printouts except for the Information window This information appears in addition to the standard VersaPro header and footer Custom header and footer information is created by entering text strings in the Folder Properties dialog box Edit menu Properties Folder You can include format switches in the text string to control the appearance of the custom text Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 25 Format Switches Tex
86. Conversion nested version Options Ctrl E Allows you to set General language related Display colors fonts Ladder show fields cell width Motion Local Logic editor and Communications options Window Menu Option Action Cascade Alt 6 Arranges all open block windows so that all title bars are visible and the active window is in front Tile Horizontally Resizes and horizontally arranges all open block windows so that all of them are Alt F7 visible Tile Vertically Alt F8 Resizes and vertically arranges all open block windows so that all of them are visible Arrange Icons Alt F9 Aligns all minimized block windows Close All Alt F10 Closes all open block windows Next Window F6 Moves focus among the active editor window and the dockable windows that are open In the editor window goes to the selected row or cell which may be out of view Previous Window Moves focus among the active editor window and the dockable windows that Shift F6 are open In the editor window goes to the selected row or cell which may be out of view Current Window Displays the name of the active window A 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Help Menu Contents and Index Displays VersaPro Help About VersaPro Displays information about this version of VersaPro including serial number Also displays free disk space GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and
87. Creating Motion Program LOGIC sssesssesssorsserssersserssserssersserssees 9 4 Basie REQUIRE MEn Seier aa a aida ate i 9 4 Using the Local Logic Editor sseosseosseosseecsscecseecseecssesseeossessseoso 9 6 To Open the Local Logic Editor ssnnsseesseesssesssesssesssessserssersseres 9 6 Local Leste Command sassi aris aan cian ieutenvecdediauienen 9 6 Using the Local Logic Variable Table scccsssscssssccssssoees 9 7 To open the Local Logic Variable Table c cc ecccceeceeeeeeeees 9 7 Information Provided by the Local Logic Variable Table 9 8 Saving Motion Local Logic Programs ssccccssscssssccssssoesees 9 10 Printing Motion Local Logic Program cccccsscccsssccsssees 9 10 Storing Motion Programs and Subroutines to the PLC 9 10 Restoring Motion and Local Logic Blocks ccccsseosssees 9 11 Using the Cami HClO Piece snasevssensas ccna eeassvaveicacstssennssiavesnstaanecnesaasas 9 13 Instaliine the Cam Editor soen nina eenuar made 9 13 Staking the C att EUO ssena uearaoes aan 9 14 Adding a Cam Block to the VersaPro Folder cccceecceeeeeees 9 15 Opening an Existing Cam BIOCK ccccceeccccescccseeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeees 9 15 Perlune acan BlOCK i tas tinier aa ehedieaan dene meiet EEA 9 15 Duphicating a Cam BlOCK ticateesiekis nathan EE 9 15 Viewing and Editing Cam Block Properties 9 16 Contents xiii Conte
88. DEFAULT and Port COM1 Click the Connect button to establish communications VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Serial Parameter Settings If you have used Control software version 1 00 and earlier your communications configuration may contain invalid settings for some of the SNP timers SNP is the GE Fanuc proprietary protocol used to communicate to PLCs over a serial line VersaPro can inherit these settings since it uses the same communications driver If you encounter communications difficulties it is recommended that you check the settings in the Port tab of the CCU for the serial COM port that you are using 1 Open the CCU and select the Ports tab Select the SNP port COM1 is the initially configured port for the DEFAULT device 2 Select the Display Advanced Parameters checkbox 3 If you need to make changes click the Edit button The Edit Port dialog box appears 4 To display timer values Click the Advanced button aw mow po GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 5 5 Edit the settings as required for your application The following settings are recommended Recommended Value Request Timeout 20000 or higher units are in milliseconds highest valid value is 63000 SNP_T3 At least 250 greater than Request Timeout For example if your Request Timeout parameter is 20000 set SNP_T3 to 20250 or more SNP_T3P At least 250 greater than the SNP_T3 para
89. Entering Instructions using the Function Toolbat ccceecceee 4 6 Selecting Functions Using the Function Toolbar Compact cccccsseeeeneeeees 4 6 Selecting Functions Using the Function Toolbar Expanded ccceeeeeee ees 4 7 Entering Instructions using the Ladder Toolbar eens 4 8 Entering Instructions using Keyboard Entry ceececeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 9 Completing Address and Length Information ccceecceeeseeees 4 9 DATA INI Punctions 223 nee ee eee 4 10 Completing Function Block Parameters ssccccssscsssssoees 4 11 Assigning Variables to Function Block Parameters 06 4 1 Assigning Constants to Function Block Parameters 00 4 13 Edine Ladder Losi sicicccieetiasitevstassieweasssievatwcsassuanevuuseeceseaweassas 4 15 BS SL CUI EOS Ceea e a waded oisledana weccceeie 4 15 Contents vii Contents Chapter 5 viii Using Cut Copy Paste and Delete in the LD Editor 0 0 00 4 16 Inserting an empty row in the LD Editor cece eeeeeee ees 4 17 TO 2010 tne TEX COM aan a ieee 4 17 Converting Logic Between PLC Famnillies csccssssssscoeeees 4 18 Converting Logic from 90 30 VersaMax to 90 70 n 4 18 Tips for Converting 90 30 Logic to 90 70 Logic cc eeccceesecceeeeeeeeeeesseseeneneees 4 18 Issues in Logic Converted from 90 30 to 90 70 ccccceecccseeeccseseeeeeseceeeseeseneees
90. FK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 13 2 Starting the Cam Editor You can open the Cam Editor by adding a new Cam block to the folder or double clicking an existing Cam block You can also open the Cam Editor by choosing Cam Editor from the Tools menu Master slave wE IH 100 a Position Position Curve Fit Order Coordinates of Selected Point Slave Position Y axis Master Position axis Sample Cam Profile 9 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Adding a Cam Block to the VersaPro Folder To add a Cam block to your VersaPro folder click File on the menu bar select New Motion then Cam Program The Create a New Cam Program dialog box will appear Create New Cam Program x Cancel Description Help Motion Module Type OSM 314 Type a name and a description for the Cam block and click OK The Cam Editor will open and an icon for the new Cam block will appear in the folder browser fK Example CAM Note If the Cam Editor is already open you can also create a new block in the Cam Editor project browser The new block will automatically appear in the VersaPro folder browser Opening an Existing Cam Block To open a Cam block double click its icon in the Folder Browser fK Example CAM The Cam Editor window will appear Refer to the FrameworX InfoViewer for details on developing profiles and creating links to profiles in Cam blocks Deleting a Cam Block
91. H_GE_INT SRCH_GE_DINT SRCH_GE_BYTE SRCH_GE_WORD SRCH_LT_INT SRCH_LT_DINT SRCH_LT_BYTE SRCH_LT_WORD SRCH_LE_INT SRCH_LE_DINT SRCH_LE_BYTE SRCH_LE_WORD Conversion Functions Functions INT_TO_BCD4 BCD4_TO_INT INT_TO_REAL DINT_TO_REAL BCD4_TO_REAL WORD_TO_REAL REAL TO WORD REAL _TO_INT REAL_TO_DINT Control Functions Functions DOIO SVC_REQ Control Function Blocks Function Blocks PID_IND PID_ISA 5 16 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Requires LD Boolean Instruction VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 Resulting Accumulator Value and Type Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter FD Boolean Output Parameter Q Word Output Parameter Q Integer Output Parameter Q Integer Output Parameter Q Integer Output Parameter Q Integer Output Parameter
92. IV EQ NE GT GE LT LE RANGE available for UINT N A for UINT No ENO output All have ENO output RANGE available for DWORD N A for DWORD AND OR XOR NOT SHL SHR ROL ROR BTST N A for DWORD BSET BCLR BPOS available for DWORD SWAP VMERD VMEWRT VMERMW VMETST N VME_CFG_RD DATA_INIT DATA_INIT_COMM and DATA_INIT_ASCII A MOVE BLKMOV available for UINT DINT DWORD N A for UINT DINT DWORD A SHER has N parameter no of elements to be shiftedin SHFR has no N parameter A value of is assumed TBLRD TBLWR LIFORD LIFOWRT FIFORD N FIFOWRT SORT and ARRAY_RANGE ARRAY_ MOVE SRCH_EQ _NE _GT LT GE and N A for UINT DWORD _LE available for UINT DWORD Conversion functions for BCD8 BCD8 to DINT BCD8 amp N A although has WORD to REAL which is equivalent to REAL DINT to BCD8 and for UINT UINT to to UINT to REAL BCD4 UINT to DINT UINT to INT UINT to REAL BCD4 to UINT DINT to UINT INT to UINT and REAL to UINT DINT to INT and INT to DINT N A although has REAL to UINT and UINT to REAL Conversion functions for WORD REAL to WORD and which are equivalent WORD to REAL CALL block N A on Series 90 Micro and Series 90 30 Available on VersaMax and VersaMax Micro N A END Same instruction for nested vs non nested jumps and Different instructions for nested vs non nested jumps and labels labels SVCREQ supports functions 1 28 32 39 Function 26is SVCREQ sup
93. If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the Tab key selects the next cell to the right If the current cell has been selected for editing the Tab key submits the contents of the cell for row validation and selects the next cell to the night Note Moving from one row to another by tabbing left from the leftmost cell or right from the rightmost always triggers row validation Shift Tab If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the Shift Tab keys select the next cell to the left If the current cell has been selected for editing the Shift Tab keys submits the contents of the cell for row validation and selects the next cell to the left Note Moving from one row to another by tabbing left from the leftmost cell or right from the rightmost always triggers row validation Ctrl Tab Displays the next VDT tab Local Global All System to the night Page Down Up Moves the display one vertical viewable page down up and selects the cell in the same relative x y position as before the movement Locating a Variable using the Go To Variable Dialog Box You can quickly locate variables using the Go To Variable dialog box Perform the following steps to locate a variable by name 1 From the Variable Declaration Table click the right mouse button and choose Go to Variable The Go to Variable dialog box will appear
94. Modifying Block Properties ccceccccseeecceeeceeseeeeeeecseneeeeneeesees 3 8 Moving Folder Components iiicdieitestenewiat niente a eiendtees 3 9 Cuttin Polder CompOnen t8 ira cichias Wisestsutsashed aiondsbetian los tute becaande shone Shasanceseees 3 10 Cop vine FOIE C ONIDOMENUS eisian nao a e aaen 3 10 Pastine Polder COmponents sscusc0ccivasacasanddansenuanssGrhaceaavalgassensa ionkdestgoatenmetantduseias 3 10 Dragging and Dropping in the Folder Browser cccccseseccneseeceeeeeeeeeeeneeees 3 11 Perine A BIOCK scnisnmus conden ach ctaneaaaenraes adstscaanemrruseduttusacns Geen 3 12 To delete a block or View Table cs cca caceraschetetacadecesesetinedintadedshocesaiulestn vate ndeevatide dans 3 12 To delete the contents of the MAIN block cece ee eececececececeecececectceees 3 12 Savile a D lC E x 2seeturi eet shee icearin hier ede iesie adres 3 13 TOES AVS a DOCK isis ost else a A oaths det aac sige E cen uuhe duel oaeadeelianes A 3 13 TO S111 2 Block ya serach va carte sss Barve a deatone snes ean am eed aati etea tae ees 3 13 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 4 GFK 1670D Contents Using Editing Operations on Folder Components 00008 3 14 Usma Wid Osan Kederi ed end a heal Untedaden hah basideaaate dealt 3 14 Working with Variables while Editing Blocks eee ees 3 14 Searching and Replacing in VersaPro ccssccccsssscss
95. O Display the value in octal format CTRL SHIFT R Display the value in real format CTRL SHIFT S Display the value in scientific notation format CTRL SHIFT U Display the value in decimal format HHHH view tables 8 2 8 3 _MAIN3 1 9 90 30 Rack configuring 7 8 90 70 Rack configuring 7 8 A Abbreviations 1 4 Accessing Hardware Configuration 7 2 Adding elements to a View Table 8 8 Address completing in IL Editor completing in LD Editor 4 9 Advanced User Parameters EGD CPUE0S5 format 7 41 Associated device 10 2 Audit Trail mode configuring log view 7 48 setting 7 7 Auto Backup setting number of 1 6 Auto Correct 7 6 Autoconnect options setting 8 Backing up a folder 2 18 Bases VersaMax configuring 7 21 power supply booster 7 21 Bitmap copy as 4 16 GFK 1670D Index Block language setting default 1 6 Block logic converting 3 21 JB 22 Block properties viewing 3 8 Block size maximum 3 7 Blocks MANGT arranging in browser 3 8 changing order 3 9 closing 3 13 copying between folders 3 5 deleting inserting 3 5 locating names addresses or call statements 3 17 opening saving Boolean expressions nesting 5 17 Browser 2 13 Built in functions IL editor 5 13 Cable and connections for serial port B 3 Cable diagrams serial connection B 6 Cam blocks creating deleting duplicating editing p
96. Opened Mar 04 1999 05 52 24 Validating Hardware Configuration chkfinal vias Mar 04 1999 05 52 24 Validating Hardware Configuration completed Errors Mar 04 1999 05 54 46 Edit Module IC200PW ROOT at O CPU chkfinal ver Mar U4 1999 05 54 46 Replace Module ICZOUPW ROOT at 0 CPU with Moc Mar 04 1999 05 55 17 Add Base IC200CHS003 at 0 1 chkfinal vroiax Mar 04 1999 05 55 32 Edit Module GENERIC_AIN at 0 1 chkfinal vrriax Mar 04 1999 05 55 32 Add Module GENERIC_AIM at 0 1 chkfinal ymax Mar 04 1999 05 55 59 Validating Hardware Configuration chkfinal via Mar 04 1999 05 55 59 Validating Hardware Configuration completed Errors Wlar 04 1999 05 56 00 Save Aacksystem C Program Files GE Fanuc or H bdn 0A ANA 0C CA0 APL doa oP bod es eer eer me ee ee ee HWC provides two modes for recording log data e Exception Only Mode Only warnings and exception conditions are recorded in the log e Audit Trail Mode default mode Informational messages such as module deletes adds etc are recorded in the log in addition to warnings and exception conditions To change the setting for the log file select the Tools menu and choose Options The Options dialog box will display allowing you to set Audit Trail Mode and adjust the default log file size The Log View is a dockable view which means that you can select it with your mouse and move it anywhere in the HWC main window You can control display o
97. Pro list format not as text and other rows shift to fill the cut space If you want to insert the variables between existing variables on the destination VVT rather than overwrite existing variables select any cell in the row beneath the desired insertion point If you want to overwrite existing variables select the rows that you wish to overwrite Choose Paste from the Context Sensitive or Edit menu click the Paste button ej or press Ctrl V If the variables are inserted they appear in a new row above the row in which a cell is selected and are appended to any other affected table s If the variables overwrite previously existing variables they appear in the position of those variables Details on Cutting and Copying GFK 1670D Variables cut or copied from a VVT can be pasted only in the same or another view table They can also be pasted between view tables in different folders Cutting or copying a variable in a VVT does not affect the VDT Variables can be cut or copied during monitoring Text can be pasted into the name field only when it 1s in edit mode Note Only entire rows may be cut Selecting any cell in a row and then cutting results in cutting the entire row Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 5 1 Details on Pasting If more variables reside on the clipboard than have been selected to be overwritten the selected variables are overwritten and the remaining clipboard variables are insert
98. Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D B Details on Exporting an SNF File e The following Field Names are exported as O PT_ID name variable name O ADDR C address block name format for local variables variable reference address and scope DESC variable description PT_TYPE variable type LENGTH length of variable RETENTIVE variable retentive state OVERRIDE variable override state Oo Of OF OU O STORED_VAL stored values in comma delimited format SHOW_EXT variables to be viewed by HMI e The amp amp FileType section of the SNF header will be I O O VersaPro does not export the DelVarDEcl section of the SNF header O Any additional comments in the SNF files must be added using an outside editor O The default extension of the exported file is SNF GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 17 a Variable Resolution This dialog allows you to easily resolve variable conflicts You can keep existing variable definitions or overwrite them This dialog appears as the result of a Paste Import SNF or Insert Block operation that causes one or more variables to conflict with existing variables Variable Resolution Dialog 6 18 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D If Prompt for Each Conflict is selected the following dialog box will appear Variable Conflict Dialog R0000 Global 7 _AdiNew Uee Exist
99. SO0S 170 Carrier Connector Style Replace Carrer B ase GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 19 Changing Configuring the CPU The default CPU is IC200CPUOOl To replace the CPU 1 Click the secondary mouse button and choose Replace CPU from the CSM 2 Select a CPU from the Module Catalog The Parameter Editor window for the selected CPU will appear 3 Review and modify CPU parameters in the Parameter Editor 4 When you are finished editing the CPU parameters click the window close button to Close the Parameter Editor window To view or change CPU parameters l Click the secondary mouse button and choose Configure CPU Parameters from the CSM The Parameter Editor window for the CPU will appear Review and modify CPU parameters in the Parameter Editor When you are finished editing the CPU parameters click the window close button to Close the Parameter Editor window Note To configure EGD exchanges for a CPUEOS see Ethernet Global Data Configuration on page 7 31 Rack Module Operations 7 20 In addition to configuring the CPU or NIU the VersaMax rack configuration is completed through the following operations as required Changing Configuring the Power Supply Adding Module Carriers Adding Power Supply Booster Bases Configuring a Power Supply for a Booster Base Adding Configuring Modules Deleting Carriers Clearing the Rack Configuring VersaMax Expansion Networks VersaPro
100. Subroutine All except Series 90 Micro Instruction List Subroutine Series 90 30 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro External C Block Series 90 70 Series 90 30 models 350 351 352 360 363 and 364 Motion Local Logic Motion and Cam Series 90 30 DSM314 motion module programs Creating a Subroutine Is With a folder open choose New from the File or Context Sensitive menu From the Subroutine submenu select Ladder or Instruction List You can al ape a Ladder subroutine by clicking the New Block button on the toolbar S The Create New Ladder Diagram or Create New Instruction List dialog box appears On the Basic Properties tab enter a unique name for the new block If you are creating a timed interrupt block for a 90 30 PLC the block name must conform to the requirements for Timed Interrupt If you wish enter a description for the block To assign Interrupt parameters to the block select the Schedule tab Double click under the Type column to select I O Interrupt or Timed Interrupt For details about the interrupt parameters click the dialog box Help button Note For a 90 30 timed interrupt block the block name determines the time base delay and time interval parameters If you change these values an error message will appear when you try to close the dialog 3 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 5 To place restrictions on editing or viewing the block select the Lo
101. The Undo menu option will be grayed out if there 1s no previous undo operation to perform e To redo an action click the Redo button select the Edit menu and choose Redo or press Ctrl Y The Redo menu option will be grayed out if there is NO previous operation to redo Working with Variables while Editing Blocks VersaPro allows you to create variables while you are working with logic One way to do this is to add a block with new variables to your logic New variables included in an added block are checked for validity If they are valid they are added to the Variable Declaration Table and are available for use Temporary variables must be declared if you are using Instruction List for blocks To create a variable when adding a block 1 Open a folder 2 Add a block with defined variables to the folder 3 Row validation is performed on each variable to check for global scope conflicts with existing variables 3 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 4 Ifa variable fails row validation an error message appears describing the problem 5 Click OK A dialog box appears allowing you to correct the problem If the problem is corrected row validation continues for other variables If you click Cancel the variable is not added to the VDT and the entire process is cancelled When row validation is completed and no conflicts exist the Variable Declaration Table is populated with original data
102. To proceed click OK Note All non nested instructions will be converted to their nested forms This conversion may increase the size of the compiled logic Also this conversion cannot be undone GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 23 Chapter 4 GFK 1670D Working in the LD Editor The LD Editor window allows you to create edit display and monitor programs and blocks created in ladder logic This chapter introduces you to the LD Editor window and how you can customize its look as well as how to create and edit logic Chapter Contents How to access the LD Editor An overview of the LD Editor Window How to customize the LD Editor Window display and set rung editing and coil checking options How to enter and edit logic Converting LD logic between 90 70 and 90 30 VersaMax 4 1 Overview of the LD Editor 4 2 The Ladder Diagram Editor is used to create programs using the Ladder Diagram programming language Ladder Diagram is used to graphically represent the actions to be performed by a PLC The editor window is divided in to rows rungs Each rung is divided into cells Each cell can accept a logic element function block or relay function The LD Editor allows you to enter ladder logic elements via keyboard mouse or toolbar All elements are inserted by overwriting the contents of the selected cell The figure below shows some of the commonly referenced components of the LD Editor window and browser view
103. VersaMax Nano Micro 7 44 _ Pulse width modulation GFK 1670D Series 90 Micro 7 46 VersaMax Nano Micro 7 44 _ Q Quick reference D I R Rack modules Series 90 Rack modules VersaMax deleting Rack type default 1 6 Rack type Series 90 30 90 70 changing 7 8 Rack clearing Series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax Real time updates Redo 3 14 Redundancy CPU basic 7 14 Reference Address column IL ditor 5 2 Reference View hardware confi guration 7 47 Reference View Tables adding an address 8 9 changing displa format 8 6 conversion creating new overview 8 3 Remote ethernet interfaces setting aliases 7 34 Remote I O communications configuring load store verity Request Timeout for serial communications modem communications GFK 1670D Index Index with Modem Turnaround Time Reserved words 6 4 Reset parameters 7 5 Restoring ad oe i Logic blocks 9 11 Restoring a folder 2 19 Restoring EGD and Name Resolution 7 41 Restricting folder access 2 19 Revision checking ee rey RIO See Remote I O RS 232 point to point connections RS 232 RS 485 converter B 5 RS 422 interface Rules for constants 4 14 5 7 Run Mode 10 26 S Saving blocks 3 13 Saving View Tables 8 13 Search and Replace 3 18 Selected blocks printing 2 24 Selecting instructions 5 4 Selecting logic 4 15 LD editor Serial parameter set
104. VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Printing Your Program Hardware Configuration is not included in any printed report If you want to print out Hardware Configuration you must do so using the Stand Alone Hardware Configuration utility Reports and printouts can only be generated for the folder that 1s open Printing a Report The Print Report dialog box allows you to define which components should be printed when you generate a report You can print Blocks a Cross Reference a Table of Contents a Header Page and Variables The Print dialog box allows you to choose printers print ranges and the number of copies that you want to print The Page Setup dialog box allows you to select paper size source orientation and margins Information about which Print Components which Blocks and which details about blocks whether or not a Table of Contents or a Header page and whether Cross References and the associated Reference Addresses are to be included in printing 1s retained after you generate your first report You can change this information as desired but you need not reset the specifications every time you print All other settings require input each time a report is generated Perform the following steps to customize and print your program Note To add custom header and or footer text to reports and folder printouts edit the Folder Properties Go to the Edit menu choose Properties and Fol
105. You can also check a program when I O hardware is connected by using overrides to prevent coil operation Overrides can temporarily bypass a failed input device so that machine operation can continue until the device can be repaired However using overrides in this manner can cause the overriding of safety devices and is not recommended The override state shown in the VDT initializes the variable when stored values or overrides are stored It does not show the current override state as a program is running Override may only be checked on a non system bit variable assigned to G I M or PQ EXT When the EXT show externally field is selected the variable can be shared by other applications Reserved Words In addition to function block names the following words are reserved and may not be used as variable program block label or task names AUX LPT1 CLOCKS LPT2 COMI LPT3 COM2 LPT4 COM3 LPT5 COM4 LPT6 COMS5 LPT7 COM6 LPT8 COM7 LPT9 COM8 NUL COM9 PRN CON 6 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D a Creating and Modifying Variables VersaPro allows you to create and modify variables for use in program logic Variables can have different data types scopes lengths and addresses Several variables can reference the same address and you can associate descriptions and initial stored values with any variable VersaPro allows you to create and modify variables on the fly or prior to pr
106. a dual bus network This option provides redundancy of both the PLC and the I O bus GDB control strategy Configuring CPU Redundancy Over Genius CPU Redundancy Over Genius Types There are five types of CPU Redundancy Over Genius systems which are built upon the various types of redundant Genius systems CPU Redundancy GHS Using Genius Dual GBC Redundancy Paired GBC External Single Bus with Preferred Master CPU Redundancy GDB Using Genius Dual GBC Redundancy Paired GBC External Single Bus with Floating Master CPU Redundancy GDB Using Genius Dual Bus Redundancy Paired GBC External Single Bus with Floating Master CPU Redundancy GDB Using Genius Dual Bus and Dual GBC Redundancy Dual Bus with Floating Master CPU Redundancy GDB Using a Mixed Genius Redundancy Scheme 7 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D General Procedure for Configuring CPU Redundancy Over Genius The following procedure configures two separate PLCs in two equipment folders The first one configured will be considered the Primary PLC in the system The software will automatically create the configuration for the Secondary PLC You will need to Import the Secondary configuration into its own folders The configuration of the two PLCs will be identical except for a few necessary differences such as CPU Redundancy Mode Primary or Secondary and the Serial Bus Addresses SBA of the GBCs 31 for the P
107. a folder is created the Folder Nickname defaults to the last 7 characters of the folder name GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 11 Directory structure and files for a new folder When a new empty folder is created the following files are created at the folder s specified location For these examples the folder s name is newfolder _MAIN bIk the _MAIN block newfolder fld a description of the folder s contents newfolder vdt the Variable Declaration Table newfolder hwcfg Hardware Configurations newfolder ssx Smart Store Extensions For a new folder created based on an LM90 import named for example LM90impt the folder is created at the specified location including these files _MAIN bIk the _MAIN block a blk file for each LM90 block LM90impt fld a description of the folder s contents LM90impt vdt the Variable Declaration Table newfolder hwcfg Hardware Configurations newfolder ssx Smart Store Extensions Opening an Existing Folder 2 12 VersaPro allows you to open a folder from a local drive or floppy disk or from a network drive Perform the following steps to open an existing VersaPro folder 1 From the File menu choose Open Folder or on the toolbar click the Open Folder a button 2 If another folder is already open a dialog box appears asking if you wish to close the open folder 3 Once you have closed the open folder an Open dialog box appears Folders have file type fld s
108. a lik saslaatisacebas 8 9 Adding a Range to a Reference View Table ccccccceeeceneeeeeees 8 9 Modifying Information in a View Table ccccsssccssssscceeeees 8 10 Editing Operations in View Tablles ccccsscccsssccssscccsssccessees 8 11 Using cut copy paste ma V VT cacosaveanss sass eaer iaaa 8 11 Details on Cuttins and Cop yiie aissa a aa aa Cale ae babthecletas 8 11 Delalis On Pastis mh tech eas eae nae lanes a teat naiical le tases Moat omeacutas 8 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 9 GFK 1670D Contents TOdras anid drop Cutan a NVT enisi gorndussacondeietoundeatanendsbataasteataoaeeesuees 8 12 FOdrae anid drop copy Mia VV AT aeea 8 12 Details on Dragging and Dropping in a VVT ccc cecccccceeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseeenees 8 13 Sav View ACS oss a aureus sae acinar leanasve ase EERE 8 13 Online V TOWING sarcen 8 14 Details about Online VieWING ccceccccsececeeecceeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeseees 8 14 To Toggle or Override a Reference in an RVT ccccceeeeeeeeeees 8 14 To Write a Value to a Reference in an RVT 0 0 eee ceeeeeneeeees 8 15 Motion PFOOTAMMMING 535 isyiis seencatsecentattacersawsaceataeerd sussepiteetaetecensises 9 1 Setting Motion Program Local Logic Editor Options 9 2 Using the Motion Program EGiItor sccccssscssssccssscccsssccssssoees 9 3 To Open the Motion Program Editor reisiin iiaii 9 3
109. aintains default values for all advanced user parameters These default values satisfy the needs of most applications Under special circumstances some users may need to modify some of these parameters Advanced user parameters can be modified using an Advanced User Parameters file which can be created using an ASCII text editor This file contains the name and value of all non default advanced user parameters The Ethernet firmware assigns the proper default value to every advanced user parameter not specified in the Advanced User Parameters File All advanced user parameter data for a single Ethernet interface must be provided in a single file The Advanced User Parameter file is named AUP_O_O apf where O_O specifies the rack and slot location of the embedded Ethernet interface within the CPUEOS This file is placed in the folder containing the PLC configuration During a Configuration Store operation the VersaPro programmer stores the Advanced User Parameter file into the PLC along with the PLC Configuration GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 41 7 42 Advanced User Parameter File Format AUP r s lt parameter name gt lt parameter value gt lt parameter name gt lt parameter value gt lt parameter name gt lt parameter value gt e One parameter may be specified per line e ach parameter is listed by name and value separated by an equals sign e All parameter names must be entered in lower case e Param
110. al Accumulator To define IL Temporary Variables go to the Edit menu and select Properties Variable Table Once temporary variables have been defined these references may not be referenced directly in the program Error Checking The following error checking is performed on the IL program when it is compiled 1 The type of the Accumulator must be compatible with the type of the operator 2 ALD instruction or Function call must occur before a ST instruction Accumulator must have a Value and Type 3 Parenthesis of nested expressions must be matched 4 Reference Types must be correct for operators For example can t do a S R00001 since data type must be bit JMPs and MCRs must have matching labels All variables must be defined CALs must have matching IL LD Blocks Reference Addresses must be within the limits of the configured CPU me et ae ea Function and Function Block parameters must be the correct memory types and values GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 19 Chapter 6 GFK 1670D Working with the Variable Declaration Table The Variable Declaration Table VDT is the window used to create edit and view variables online The VDT usually displays automatically when the Folder Browser is open If the VDT is not displaying from the Folder Browser select the View menu and select Variable Declaration Table or click the Variable Declaration Table toolbar button El This chap
111. al Customers direct dial 804 978 6036 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 1 Chapter 2 GFK 1670D Contents PEVEP OCU CEION cists venedscivwnesataueusscchscesvassiwendestisncaavensieeaesas EDANE Ea 1 1 Welcome to Versa Prosica onse 1 1 Installing VersaPro Software ccccccccsecccsseccsecceseseceeeeeeseeceneneeees 1 2 Startno VeraPro SOlW Ale nananana E 1 2 Multiple Instances of VersaPro cccccccccsescccsesecceecceeeseeeeneeeneneeeees 1 3 Using VersaPro OV View scic cntiintines isis ease 1 3 The Workbench Window ccccsccceecceeeceecceeeceeeceeeeeeaeseeeeeeaeeees 1 5 Setting Workbench OPptions cccccceccccseeeceeeeeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeseneeeeeseeseeneesaeseeseneees 1 5 Setting Display OptionS essessseesseessersseesssesssesssersseressersserssersseesseesseesssessserss 1 7 Setting Communications OptionSs s ssssesssesseessersssesssresssessseesserssersserssseesseens 1 8 Sees Ladder O MUONS reisas E l 11 Synchronizing VersaPro with HWC sessesseessesseesssesssesssesssessserss 1 14 Working With Folders sesseescteysiasncsuvdccidaneessacacvtswstacsesectasberscannsensas 2 1 Creating and Opening VersaPro Folders ccccsssossssccsssees 2 2 Creatine aA New Fo de wasiicaiesnconcctsatoaiceneencndsnnan NE 2 2 PO create a News empty TOMO acntetectlcu alate e e E 2 2 To create a new folder based on an existing VersaPro folder
112. and with data from the added block To assign temporary variables 1 Open the folder for which you wish to use temporary variables 2 Goto the Edit menu and choose Properties Variable Table The Properties dialog box appears Select the Temporary Variables IL tab Click the Temporary Variables IL button The Boolean Address Start and Integer Address Start fields enable Type a valid starting bit address for Boolean temporary variables Type a valid starting word address for Integer temporary variables oo Se oy ae ee The ending addresses for Boolean temporary variables and for integer temporary variables are automatically calculated 9 Click OK Note If at any point you wish to delete the current temporary variables you can do so by selecting the No Temporary Variables IL radio button The memory areas used for Temporary variables may not overlap with those used for Conversion variables Temporary variables may not overlap with program variables GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 15 Searching and Replacing in VersaPro VersaPro provides a number of tools to navigate locate and search for and replace data in folder components This section describes the methods of locating information and using search and replace in the Folder Browser Navigating in VersaPro There are several methods of finding and going to certain points in folder components e Go To This action allows you to go to a specific ro
113. application e facut or copied variable s length is greater than 1 its stored values are separated by commas when pasted to external applications like Microsoft Excel e When cut or copied to the clipboard Retentive and Override values are stored as 1 for True and 0 for False e tis not possible to make non contiguous row selections with the keyboard e The following fields cannot be cut from a variable Type Length Scope Retentive Override Details on Pasting e If more variables reside on the clipboard than have been selected to be overwritten the selected variables are overwritten and the remaining clipboard variables are inserted on to the table s e If fewer variables reside on the clipboard than have been selected to be overwritten as many of the selected variables as possible are overwritten and the rest are deleted e Nothing may be pasted into the System tab e Nothing may be pasted into the Temporary tab e Ifa variable is pasted onto the Global table it becomes a global variable regardless of its original scope e Ifa variable is pasted onto a Local table it becomes local to that block regardless of its original scope e Ifa global variable is pasted onto the All table it remains global e Ifa local variable is pasted onto the All table the program will attempt to assign it to its defined block If that block does not exist in the folder it will be made a global variable e Any values changed by
114. ar GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 13 4 14 To assign a constant using the mouse 1 Click the arrow button to de select any active functions Double click on the parameter cell where you want to assign a variable The variable combo box will appear 2 Type the constant value Press the Enter key If the constant is not valid for the function block an error message will appear Rules on constants A constant s value may not exceed the capacity of the operand s type and must be entered in a format consistent with the Function Block type Format Prefix Example Decimal etal Scientific VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Editing Ladder Logic Once logic is in your LD program you may need to edit copy or delete sections of logic This section describes how to select logic in the LD editor and how to delete copy and paste selected logic Selecting Logic GFK 1670D Before you can perform editing operations on LD logic you need to select the logic you plan to work with This section describes how to select logic using the mouse and keyboard To set a selection in the Ladder Editor using the mouse FLL 1 Make sure placement mode is clicking on the arrow button normal pointer on the Ladder toolbar k 2 Place the mouse pointer over a cell or over the power rail next to a rung 3 Press and hold the primary mouse button 4 Drag the mouse to move t
115. ariables LD radio button 6 The starting address fields for Boolean and Integer variables become enabled Note If at any point you wish to delete the current conversion variables you can do so by selecting the No Variables IL radio button 7 To assign Boolean variables enter a valid starting bit address e Boolean conversion variables can only be assigned in the M Q and T Memory areas and must start on a byte aligned address for example 1 9 17 etc 8 To assign Integer variables enter a valid starting word address e Integer conversion variables can only be assigned in the R AI and WAQ Memory areas e Starting and ending address values must be in the range 1 99 999 e Neither starting address field may be left empty As you type each starting address its ending address is dynamically calculated and displayed in the read only field beneath it 9 Click OK GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 2 Converting Block Logic Once conversion variables have been configured you can select a block for conversion from IL to LD Be sure to check the block s syntax before converting the block Select Check Block or Check All from the Folder menu 1 Select a block in the Folder Browser or make the block you want to convert the active block 2 Select the Tools menu and choose Convert Block The logic in the block you are attempting to convert is checked for syntactical validity If the logic is found to
116. ation and motion logic and stored overridden values Motion programs for the Motion Mate DSM314 module are stored as part of hardware configuration 4 VersaPro will store the selected components to the PLC If the store is successful a message box will appear The Information Window will provide additional details about the store operation CPU Model Checking When a configuration is Stored all VersaMax modular and micro models reject configuration for a different model Version 8 00 and later 350 and above 90 30 CPUs do not check the CPU model type when a configuration is stored they will accept configuration for a different model Versions earlier than 8 00 do have this check they will reject configuration for a different model Word for Word Changes in LD Word for word changes may be performed on Series 90 30 Series 90 Micro and VersaMax modular PLCs VersaMax Nano Micro PLCs do not support word for word changes Changes to the program that do not modify the size of the program are considered word for word changes Examples include changing the type of contact or coil or changing a reference address used for an existing function block VersaPro Goes Unequal After Check All or Verify If the following conditions exist when making a Word for Word reference address change e The reference is the highest reference used in the program e The address is changed to a lower value for example from 500 to 499 e The referenc
117. ault Tables How to obtain details about individual faults Sorting faults Saving fault information Clearing the Fault Table 11 1 Working with the PLC and I O Fault Tables To view the PLC and I O Fault Tables your PC must be connected to and online with the PLC You can connect to the PLC before opening the Fault Tables If VersaPro is not connected to a PLC and you open the Fault Table window then click the PLC or IO button the Connect dialog box will appear For details refer to Connecting to a PLC in chapter 10 Note Some CPUs do not support multiple connections so both the VersaPro main application and the Fault Table cannot be connected at the same time You should disconnect VersaPro from the PLC and then launch the Fault Table When you need to reconnect to the PLC with VersaPro you should first close the Fault Table Viewing the PLC and I O Fault Tables To view the Fault Table from VersaPro go to the Tools menu and choose Fault Table If you are in the PLC Fault Table click the IO toolbar button to access the I O Fault Table File Edit View Comm Window Help l x Pic 1o la R CURRENT TABLE PLC COMMUNICATIONS STATUS Connected TOP FAULT DISPLAYED 0 TABLE LAST CLEARED 40 02 96 16 06 03 TOTAL FAULTS 6 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 0 PLC DATE TIME 10 04 96 11 12 28 FAULT FAULT DATE TIME OCATION DESCRIPTION MM DD YY HH MM SS mm Hull system configuration for run mode 10 03 96 09 09 30 00 Hull system
118. ause the window s data to be saved To hide a window click the window s button on the View toolbar or choose the window s name from the View menu To hide a dockable window choose Hide from the CSM To display a window once it has been hidden click the window s toolbar button or from the View menu choose the window s name VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Folder Operations This section describes additional operations and functions which may be performed on VersaPro folders including e Performing standard file operations close save delete backup restore e Restricting access to VersaPro folders enabling password protection e Editing folder properties Closing a VersaPro Folder Since only one folder can be open at a time in a single instance of VersaPro an open folder must be closed before creating a new folder or opening an existing folder When you try to open a folder when a folder is currently open in VersaPro you will be prompted to save the currently open folder before opening the new folder You can also close a folder by performing the following steps 1 Select the File menu and choose Close Folder If any of the folder s components have changed you will be prompted to save the changes for each component e Click Yes to save changes or No to ignore changes Clicking Cancel aborts the close operation 2 The folder is closed As part of the folder closing process the F
119. ax CPUEOS or a Series 90 70 CMM742 EGD exchanges are designed for simple efficient communication of sampled data between devices They are not intended for event notification where the possible loss of a sample of data would be significant For event notification it is recommended that a Service Request Transfer Protocol SRTP connected service be used The exchange of data is uniquely defined through a combination of the Producer ID identification number and the Exchange ID e ach device exchanging Ethernet Global data on the network must be assigned its own unique Producer ID This Producer ID uniquely identifies the source device of Ethernet Global data on the network The Producer ID number is in dotted decimal format like an IP Address For example 3 0 0 1 1s a valid Producer ID e An Exchange ID is a unique number that identifies a particular variable or group of variables to be transferred Producing devices and consuming devices operate completely asynchronously to each other Therefore for each device both the data that the device produces and the data that the device consumes must be separately defined Note For the CPUEOS the local Ethernet device used for each exchange is specified as a Rack Slot value instead of as a configured Adapter Name The CPUEOS5 does not support named aliasing and name resolution and routing To define EGD exchanges for a CPUEOS refer to page 7 36 GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hard
120. be a duplicate of a previously sent sample Use the timestamp feature to verify whether the data is new The CPU364 and CMM742 use SNTP timestamping The CPUEO5 uses NTP timestamping e The first update of the data sample from the CPU to the network adapter will occur at the end of the first scan The first production of data onto the network will occur one Production Period after the CPU transitions to the I O Enabled state e The CPU in the consumer will scan the data at the Scan Period independent of when the data 1s updated from the network The network adapter updates the data upon arrival of the data sample from the network Data will not be updated in CPU memory unless it has been received from the network e A range of reference memory within an exchange list can be viewed as coherent to scan if the length 1s less than 256 bytes If interrupts are enabled a string of multiple ranges may not all be deposited on the consumer side during the same scan GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 37 Ethernet Global Data Example 1 7 38 Here is an example to illustrate how EGD works The figure that follows shows three devices two PLCs and a PC running CIMPLICITY HMI participating in an EGD exchange Device A Device B Device C Assigned Producer ID 10 0 0 1 Assigned Producer ID 10 0 0 2 Assigned Producer ID 10 0 0 3 p rze ee a a ee ee a SS a es es a ee Exch Definition Prod ID 10 0 0 2 Exch JD 1 Exch Definit
121. be syntactically valid the logic is converted from one language to the other and the details of the conversion appear in the Information Window If any syntax errors are found they are logged in the Information Window and the conversion is aborted Rules for Successful Conversion The following guidelines are suggested for successful block conversion e L logic containing the following instructions cannot be converted to LD O XOR XORN XOR O ANDN ORN XORN O NOT e Use the Properties dialog box to define the use of temporary variables which are necessary for IL logic and conversion variables which are necessary whenever you convert IL logic to the LD language 3 22 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Converting Non Nested Instructions Series 90 Micro and low end 90 30 PLCs support non nested forms of the MCR ENDMCR JUMP and LABEL instructions When you import a Logicmaster folder containing non nested instructions or convert a Series 90 Micro folder to a VersaMax Nano Micro folder these instructions will not be automatically converted to nested forms To be able to compile your programs after conversion you will need to change these instructions to their nested forms MCRN ENDMCRN JUMPN and LABELN To convert non nested instructions go to the Tools menu and select Non Nested to Nested Conversion You will be prompted to indicate whether you wish to proceed with the conversion
122. ble or read from a Write Only variable GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 9 2 Saving Motion Local Logic Programs When ready to save your motion program subroutine file to your computer s hard disk either click the Save icon on the tool bar looks like a floppy diskette or click File from the Menu bar and click Save Printing Motion Local Logic Programs There are two ways to print a motion program You can use either the Print function or the Print Report function Both of these items may be found on the File menu To use the Print function with the Motion Editor active click File on the menu bar and select Print The Printer dialog box will appear Make any desired printer setup changes then click the OK button To print all motion programs as part of a report with other information in the folder click File on the menu bar and select Print Report The Print report dialog box will appear Click the Blocks checkbox on the Print Report dialog box Both motion program and local logic blocks will be printed as part of this report If you want to print only selected motion program blocks highlight those blocks in the browser then click File and select Print Report Check the Blocks checkbox and then choose the Selected radio button This limits the report to only those blocks that you have selected Storing Motion Programs and Subroutines to the PLC Motion Local Logic and Cam programs are stored as part of hardware co
123. bles in the VDT 6 7 H accessing 7 2 converting rack systems log window menus overview printing reference view setting options shortcut keys synchronizing VersaPro with toolbar 7 3 Header custom 2 25 High speed counter Index 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 Series 90 Micro 7 46 VersaMax Nano Micro Highest references used 6 14 V O Fault Table 11 1 IBM AT XT serial port B 5 IL editor built in functions 5 13 IL Editor customizing display 5 3 entering instructions nesting Boolean expressions 5 17 IL instructions entering 5 4 IL language overview Importing Variables 6 15 Information window 2 13 Inserting an empty row 4 17 Inserting objects Installing Cam Editor am tI Instruction column IL editor 5 2 Instruction List Editor overview 5 2 Instruction parameters completing in IL editor 5 5 Instructions entering in IL Editor entering in LD Editor parameters 4 5 selecting in IL editor 5 4 Keyboard entr LD editor 49 Keyboard shortcuts HWC 7 6 VersaPro D 1 GFK 1670D L Label column IL editor 5 2 Ladder display options Mer rey Ladder Logic editing 4 15 Language differences 90 70 vs 90 30 VersaMax LD Editor customizing options entering instructions overview 4 2 LD functions toolbar 4 6 LD Functions toolbar 4 7 LD instructions entering using keyboard
124. block by reference type The cross reference also lists each Rung and Instruction that uses the variable To view online use tables From the Tools menu select View Online Use Tables The Online Use Tables report provides a table for each reference type used in the folder The table identifies reference addresses used as explicit implicit or both Results are displayed in the Reports tab of the Information Window 6 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Importing and Exporting Variables Ls VersaPro allows you to import and export variables to external locations using a Shared Name File Format This section describes how to import and export variables to and from SNF Files To import a variable 1 2 Open the folder into which you wish to import an SNF file Choose Import Variable from the VDT CSM or the Tools menu A browse dialog box appears asking you to locate the file that you wish to import Locate the file that you wish to import Click the Open button The file is imported and the variables are displayed in the VDT Details on Importing an SNF File VersaPro ignores the Header section of SNF files The Imported SNF file must contain a PT_ID field and that field must be the first field in the first non comment field row The number of Data Entries must correspond to the number of Field Names VersaPro supports the following field names GFK 1670D O 0
125. bmenu and choose Set All Devices Non Redundant On all blocks that have a Redundancy parameter it will be set to No 7 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D To clear the bus Choose Clear Bus from the Edit Bus Operations submenu or from the CSM All blocks will be removed from the bus except for the controlling GBC Block Operations Except for Edit Configuration these operations cannot be performed on the controlling GBC in a Genius bus In a Redundant Controller system Edit Configuration Copy and Paste can be performed on the redundant GBC To add a block Double click an empty SBA or select the SBA go to the Edit menu and choose Block Operations Add Block The Block Catalog will appear Select a device and click OK To edit block configuration Select the block and choose Configure Parameters from the Edit Block Operations submenu or from the CSM The Parameter Editor window for the selected block will appear Keyboard shortcut Ctrl E To delete a block Select the block and choose Delete Block from the Edit Block Operations submenu or from the CSM To delete all blocks except the controlling GBC from the bus use the Clear Bus command Keyboard shortcut Del To replace a block Select the block and choose Replace Block from the Edit Block Operations submenu or from the CSM The Block Catalog will appear Select a device and click OK Drag and Drop You can use dra
126. bsequent rows move down one row The cell in the new row immediately above the insertion point is selected Ifa cell in the first row of the rung 1s selected the new row is appended to the previous rung If a cell in the first row of the first rung is selected a new rung is created above the first rung To go to the next coil GFK 1670D In the LD Editor select a contact or coil Choose Go to the Next Coil from the Edit menu or the CSM or press Alt F3 The cursor will go to the next coil that has the same name as the contact or coil you started from Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 17 Converting Logic Between PLC Families Converting Logic from 90 30 VersaMax to 90 70 Tips for Converting 90 30 Logic to 90 70 Logic When you are creating a 90 30 VersaMax PLC program that will be converted for use on a 90 70 PLC adhering to the following rules will minimize the effort involved in the conversion process 1 Do not extend an LD rung beyond 8 rows and 10 columns 2 Put all JUMPs in column 10 3 Place all coils in column 10 4 Do not use a vertical wire directly next to a function Move it over one column Then if you change the 90 30 version of an instruction to its 90 70 counterpart the rest of your rung remains the same For example a 90 30 original rung such as the following TOOO01 IH ROOO ROOO ROO BOOS ROOD ROOD will be transformed as follows when you replace the 90 30 comparison func
127. c gt lt Variable Name gt lt Reference Address gt Enter an instruction and define a variable name at the same time i e NOCON DiscreteVarTwo 112 lt Instruction Mnemonic gt lt Variable Name gt lt Reference Address gt lt Scope gt Enter an instruction and define a variable name at the same time including variable scope G Global L Local i e NOCON DiscreteVarT wo 112 G Specify the next available PLC reference address i e M lt Reference Type gt To change a selected variable s on line value in LD Editor IL Editor RVT and VVT F10 Write a value to a variable F11 Override a discrete variable or reference address F12 Toggle a discrete variable or reference address To perform operations with the connected PLC F9 Connect to a specific PLC CTRL F9 Disconnect from PLC ALT F2 Store this folder to PLC CTRL F2 Load from PLC into this folder F4 Verify this folder with PLC F5 Place the PLC in Run Mode CTRL F5 Place the PLC in Stop Mode SHIFT F4 View PLC status ALT V ALT N ALT L Set Monitor Active for All Blocks ALT V ALT N ALT A Set Monitor Active for Active Block ALT V ALT N ALT O Set Monitor Off To change a selected variable s data display format in LD Editor IL Editor RVT or VVT CTRL SHIFT B Display the value in binary format CTRL SHIFT D Display the value in signed decimal format CTRL SHIFT H Display the value in hex format CTRL SHIFT
128. ccccceeseeeeeees 2 4 To create a new folder importing a Logicmaster 90 Folder ccccecceeseeeeeees 2 6 Importing Logicmaster Folders Earlier than Release 6 0 ccceccccceseeeeeeeeeeees 2 7 When a folder contains a locked block 200 eee cc ceeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeecenseececesenseeeeaaaees 2 8 To create a new folder importing logic from a Control folder cc ceeeeeeeeeeees 2 9 Rules for Folder Names and Nickname ccccccsecccseeececeeeeeaeseeceeseceeseeeeeneees 2 11 Directory structure and files for a new folder ccc eecccseeecceseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeees 2 12 Opening an Exs une Folde sisne 2 12 Usine the Folder Browser sisscicicscsvsccsiccctcisisessccssteecsdcacetesestscevetess 2 13 Information W MGOW tienen 2 14 COMTEX E SEMSILIVES Meni serrie Ge ccenls hed te ed Ainaie ease adaeie ya 2 15 Working with Windows in the VersaPro Workspace 665 2 16 Folder Opera OS ssi iesesticecicacvececestecucscackedsdeeteceestecded eieateccssgendedess 2 17 Cosmea Versab ro Foldere A 2 17 JaV MEA FOI arnan O 2 17 Belemo a cle 8 c eer ere Terr any eiae 2 17 Backing Up and ReStorins orriei ee ack eek 2 18 ce KU Upa FON GCN versace ee estates a E 2 18 Contents Chapter 3 vi Restoring a Folder from BackUp seorsssiisisistitiesorcastienrsnintanpienbintsaa eniai 2 19 AWO BAC KUD ieseni senidualgonteese ionaderacneeuneiomteaeers 2 19 Restricting Folder ACCS Suennen a uetn 2 19 Lockins a Folder
129. ce beyond 10 feet 3 meters and for multidrop connection must be external source kk Termination resistance for the receive data RD signal needs to be connected only on units at the end of the lines Series 90 PLC products by connecting a jumper between pin 9 and pin 10 inside the 15 pin D shell with the following exception For Series 90 70 PLCs catalog numbers IC697CPU731 and IC697CPU771 the termination for RD at the PLC is implemented by a jumper between pin 9 and pin 11 B 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Multidrop Connections In the multidrop configuration the host device is configured as the master and one or more PLCs are configured as slaves This method can be used when the maximum distance between the master and any slave does not exceed 4000 feet 1200 meters This figure assumes good quality cables and a moderately noisy environment A maximum of 8 slaves can be connected using RS 422 in a daisy chain or multidrop configuration The RS 422 line must include handshaking and use wire type as specified in the Cable and Connector Specifications section IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 a44513 RS 232 SHIELDED PAIRS CONVERTER MAKE CONNECTIONS IC690ACC900 INSIDE D CONNECTORS SLAVE PIN STATION s0 D 5 o IBM AT o ar lot 3 oo COMPATIBLE 0 to gt I 2 o 0 0 3 0 E S 0 0 0 noes 05 1 Xlll X J o PORT 0 0 0 I Ea n 0 0
130. change e Producer ID The Local Producer IP Address assigned to PLC A e Group ID Used when more than one device is consuming the same exchanges from one producer Value 0 means only one device is consuming the information e Consumed Period The CPU of PLC B will scan the local network adapter for new data and or status updates every 25 milliseconds e Update Timeout The network adapter will set a status error to signal a refresh error if data is not received within 1000 milliseconds 7 40 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D e Status Word A reference address for the memory location where the status word is stored The status word can signify when an error has occurred e Time Stamp A reference address for the memory location where the time stamp is stored The time stamp can be checked to verify if the data received is a new sample rather than a duplicate of a previously received sample Restoring EGD and Name Resolution You cannot load EGD or Name Resolution from the CPU364 When you initiate the Load configuration process the confirmation dialog box presents the option of backing up the EGD and Name Resolution configuration To restore these configuration components to your folder go to the HWC File menu and select Restore EGD and Name Resolution A browser window will open to enable you to navigate to the backup file Advanced User Parameters for EGD CPUE05 The Ethernet firmware m
131. ck Name MAIN Block Type Lanquage Subroutine Ladder Diagram Description cene Hep 3 The General Properties tab displays the block s name language type description and description You can edit the Name and Description To define Timed Interrupts or I O Interrupts select the Schedule tab To lock or unlock the block select the Lock tab Moving Folder Components GFK 1670D VersaPro allows you to determine the order in which folder components including logic blocks are displayed and printed by dragging and dropping or cutting copying and pasting You can cut or copy IL LD Motion and Local Logic blocks and view tables and paste them in the same folder with a unique name or a repeated name with a suffix number You can also drag and drop and rename blocks and view tables Block pasting and dropping works within and across folders MAIN can be copied and pasted but not cut When you copy or move a block its properties will be included You can copy and paste or drag and drop Cam blocks within a folder but not between folders You can copy and paste Hardware Configuration between folders but not within the same folder Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 9 Cutting Folder Components Note To cut a block it must be closed 1 Open the Folder Browser 2 Select an item or number of items in the Folder Browser The _MAIN block VDT Hardware Configuration and Folder node cannot be cut
132. ck tab 6 Click OK A new block is created If the Folder Browser is open and a block is selected the block is added to the Folder Browser above the currently selected item If the Folder Browser is closed or the Folder node Hardware Configuration or VDT in the browser is selected the block is added at the end of the browser Creating an External C Block Note The C executable file must be created using the C Programmer s Toolkit for Series 90 PLCs Also it must be created specifically for the target PLC 90 70 or high end 90 30 90 30 C blocks do not use input output parameters 1 With a folder open choose New External from the File or Context Sensitive menu The Create New C Block dialog box appears 2 On the Basic Properties tab enter a unique name for the new block Restrictions on name entries 3 If you wish enter a description for the block Restrictions on Descriptions 4 To associate a C executable file exe to the block select the C Binary tab To locate the C program that you want to use click the browser button next to the Update Using field 5 To assign Interrupt parameters to the block select the Schedule tab Double click under the Type column to select I O Interrupt or Timed Interrupt For details about the interrupt parameters click the dialog box Help button A C block can have either Interrupt parameters or Input Output parameters not both 6 To assign Input Output parameters to the bloc
133. ck to the information window The Find tab displays the results of the Find in Blocks operation Select Find in Blocks from the Edit menu or the Folder Browser CSM Lists block rung and instruction where each instance of the item being searched for was found The Reports tab displays the results of the View Online Cross Reference and View Online Use Tables operations from the Tools menu Online Cross Reference lists all variables used in the selected block and identifies the rung or line and instruction each variable is used in The Online Use Tables report provides a table for each reference type used in the folder The table identifies reference addresses used as explicit implicit or both Note When the Information Window is resized to a larger window the scroll box becomes too large to be moved in the scroll bar To scroll the window use the arrow buttons at the either end of the scroll bar 2 14 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Context sensitive Menu The context sensitive menu CSM is not on the menu bar It appears when you click the secondary right mouse button in certain VersaPro windows or on certain elements The menu contains a list of frequently used options appropriate to the given context To use the CSM 1 Select a folder element the folder or one of its sub elements 2 Click the secondary mouse button on the element 3 A CSM similar to the one shown below appears Una
134. configuration for run mode 10 03 96 06 48 00 00 LAH data memory exhausted check parms resuming 10 03 96 06 30 46 00 User application fault 10 02 96 16 24 12 00 Hull system configuration for run mode 10 02 96 16 17 49 00 Hull system configuration for run mode 10 02 96 16 07 07 00 For Help press F1 ONLINE 11 124M OVR 11 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D To view the I O Fault Table from VersaPro click the IO toolbar button File Edit View Comm Window Help 18 x cfo tals 2 CURRENT TABLE TOP FAULT DISPLAYED TOTAL FAULTS FAULT DESCRIPTION FAULT OCATIOH HO ADDR CIRC REFERENCE 10 0 0 HWA COMMUHICATIONS STATUS TABLE LAST CLEARED PLC DATE TIME FAULT CATEGORY FAULT TYPE Connected 07 05 96 08 57 57 ENTRIES OVERFLOWED 0 10 04 96 11 32 36 DATE TIME MM DD HH MM SS mm ONLINE 11 324M OVR NUM Ui For Help press F1 Viewing Fault Details The fault table provides a summary description of each fault Additional information describing the fault can be accessed in one of the following ways e To obtain additional information for a specific fault double click the fault or select the fault and choose Fault Details Ctrl F from the Edit menu The Fault Detail dialog box will appear Microlest PLC Detail Ed Password access failed Fault Attributes Attribute Long Short Rack 0 Slot Task M
135. configured for the PLC CPU e For Associated Modem select the modem that was created in steps 1 through 4 Click the Advanced button For Connect Timeout enter a value in milliseconds of approximately 40000 40 seconds This time may be longer or shorter depending on how long it takes for the modem to establish communications Edit the Request Timeout and SNP Timer values as required by your application Click OK to accept the port In the CCU select the Devices tab Click New to add a new device to the list e For Device Name type the desired name for the device e For Device Model select the type of CPU to communicate with e For Default Port select the port that was created in step 5 e For Associated Modem select the modem that was created in steps 1 through 4 Click OK to accept the Modem Click OK in the CCU to accept the configuration changes Connecting to the PLC 10 16 L 2 In VersaPro go to the PLC menu select Connect In the Connect dialog box select the Device and Port that are configured for the modem Click Connect to initiate communications The modem will dial and communications will be initialized If the modem hangs up approximately 10 seconds after the Connect button has been pressed the Connect Timeout parameter has not been changed from the default setting see step 6 above VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Transferring Folders After you have
136. ct button Pa on the PLC toolbar The Connect dialog box will appear Select the Device Name and Port ENET for Ethernet communication Click the Connect button to establish communications When the connection is made the status information at the bottom of the screen will change to Connected Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC Device Screen a TEPA gt SNP Seva Cancel E C List AllDevices Help MOTPROG_PORT port 1 1 Automatic Port selection 10 11 Modem Connections If a Modem configuration has never been defined for a device or your PLC hardware configuration has not been set to support these connections follow the instructions below You will need to configure modem settings in the Windows Control Panel and in the Communication Configuration Utility CCU When setting up VersaPro to communicate with the PLC via modem you should ensure that the settings in the PLC match those of the modem Note Changes made to Modem Properties through the CCU are not saved in the operating system modem settings To retain these changes you must edit the Modem Properties in the Windows Control Panel Modem Configuration and Cabling Refer to the setup documents cabling AT commands general setup for your modem at http www gefanuc com support plc modems htm or on our FaxLink system 804 978 5824 Data Linc dialup leased line 2307 MultiTech 1932ZDX 2308 Boca Modem V
137. ct the Folder menu and choose Restore The Restore Folder dialog box will appear 3 In the Source Folder field enter the path and name of the folder that you want to restore or locate it by clicking on the Open Folder button and selecting the folder in the Browse dialog box that appears 4 Inthe Destination field enter the location to which you wish to restore the folder or locate the path by clicking on the Open Folder button and selecting it in the Browse dialog box that appears 5 Click OK The folder that you selected is restored to the location that you specified Auto Backup By default VersaPro automatically backs up a folder when you save it and keeps the three most recent backup copies flb files To set Auto Backup options go to the Tools menu and select Options On the General tab of the Options dialog box clear the Enable Auto Backup with a Limit of check box to disable Auto Backup To enable Auto Backup select the check box You can specify the number of files from 1 to 100 that will be kept Restricting Folder Access VersaPro allows you to restrict access to a folder by locking it A locked folder s contents may be viewed but not changed A folder may be locked with or without a password Ifa folder is locked with a password you must enter the password to unlock the folder A locked folder is read only Locking a Folder Perform the following steps to lock a folder 1 Open the folder you want to lock
138. cted radio button you must first go to the folder browser and select the block or blocks that you want to print To include a Cross Reference list in your report click the Cross References checkbox then choose whether you want to include Cross References for the entire folder or per block by clicking the appropriate option button If you choose to print Cross References per block and you want to include identifiers Jump Label Names Calls and MCR Names check the Identifiers box in the Include list VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Note The Cross Reference includes implicit addresses for all variables that use them Implicit addresses are enclosed by brackets e To include Variable Tables in your report click the Variables checkbox then select which variables you want to include by checking the appropriate checkboxes e To include Local Logic variables select the Include Local Logic Variables checkbox e To select paper size source orientation and margins choose Page Setup from the File menu or click the Page Setup button in the Print Report dialog Click the OK button to save your specifications e To print contents of the report select Print Table of Contents e To print Folder Properties information select Print Header Page e To change the starting page number for the report type the number you want in the Starting Page Number box Maximum 1s 9999 Default is 1 2
139. ded subnet id bits are normally taken from the host id GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 35 bits adjacent to the net id and the subnet mask identifies these bits In your Ethernet module configuration you specify these bits as one 1 and the remaining host id bits as zero 0 For example IP Address 11 22 33 44 Net Id bits 255 0 0 0 Net Id 11 0 0 0 Added Subnet Id bits 0 255 0 0 Subnet Id 0 22 0 0 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Extended Net Id 11 22 0 0 Subnet ids and subnet masks are entered into the Routing Table when configuring Multiple Gateways The extended net id for example 11 22 0 0 in the above example should be entered for the subnet id All nodes on a subnetted network must use the same value for subnet mask subnets are distinguished by different subnet id s created by your local assignment of IP addresses Defining EGD Exchanges 7 36 You need to specify the operating characteristics and data to be exchanged for each exchange your PLC will produce or consume Note the following exchange limitations e The maximum number of exchanges that can be defined for a PLC system is as follows Series 90 70 CMM742 255 Series 90 CPU364 128 VersaMax CPUEOS 16 This number can be divided up into any combination of produced and consumed exchanges e Upto 100 variables can be configured per exchange The CPUEOS is restricted to a total of 1200 variables across all EGD exchanges e The total size of a si
140. der In the Folder Properties dialog box you can specify a text string using format switches to control the appearance of the custom information For details see Custom Header Footer Formatting GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 23 2 24 l From the open folder select the File menu and choose Print Report The Print Report dialog box will appear Use this dialog box to customize your listing as described below Printer Name Tech_Wirt_PLC Where CHONTOO tech_wrt_plc l Printto File All Include Logic Blocks Tables I Variables LJFrope Variable Include Declaration Table Global Variables ties Local Variables System Variables nformation Temporary Variables Options l Print Table of Contents Print Header Page Starting Page Number hi V Use Tables M Cross Reference OK Cancel Help Note To include Blocks in your report click the Blocks checkbox When multiple blocks are printed they are printed in the order they appear in the Folder Browser In the Blocks group check each block element that you want to include in the report You can choose d d O Note Logic Properties Variable Information all variables used in this block plus local variables even if they are not used in the block To activate the Sele
141. ding from the PLC 10 17 storing to the PLC verifying folder data Transferring your VersaPro license Turn off warnings 1 6 Type instructions U Undo 3 14 Undo actions setting number of 1 6 Undo levels setting 7 7 Unequal after check all or verify 10 18 Unused variables finding 6 14 Update in progress or unavailable 10 28 Use tables online 6 14 V Value column IL ditor 5 2 Variable Declaration Table address field clearing compacting 6 14 description field 6 3 EXT field 6 4 Index amp VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide Novembe 2004 GFK 1670D field descriptions 6 3 length field name field 6 3 navigating 6 6 navigating with the keyboard navigating with the mouse overrides field retentive field saving edits scope field 6 3 stored value field 6 3 tabs 6 2 type field 6 3 Variable Name Variable View Tables creating new 8 4 customizing display 8 7 overview Variables assigning to function block parameters 4 11 assigning to instruction operands 5 5 creating 6 5 creating when adding blocks exportingys Tab 17 6 7 importing and exporting 6 15 locating in the VDT 6 7 modifying 6 5 replacing in LD Editor 4 13 sorting 6 12 using Cut Copy Paste and Drag and Drop 6 8 with aor VersaMax expansion networks configuring 7 23 VersaMax modules shared IDs 7 27 7 31 VersaMax
142. displaying until monitoring is turned off GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 27 Changing the Display Format of Monitored Logic 1 Connect to the PLC whose executing logic you wish to monitor Make sure that the logic in the current folder is equal to that on the PLC Select one variable in the IL or LD Editor Choose Display Format from the Context Sensitive or View menu oh ee ee From the submenu that appears choose the format in which you wish data to display You can choose Octal Binary Hex Real Only available for the Real data type Scientific Notation Only available for the Real data type Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal The display format you select is applied to the selected variables Update in progress or unavailable Press F1 for Help The Update in progress or unavailable Press F1 for Help message is placed on the window title bar while VersaPro is waiting for real time data from the PLC This message may appear on the Reference View Table Logic and Variable View Table windows This message will appear momentarily under normal operation while real time updates RTU are active If this message remains on the window title bar for an extended amount of time it is an indication that you have more windows open for RTU than can be supported by the PLC In this situation you should place VersaPro in Monitor Active mode using the View menu or tool bar or reduce the number of windo
143. dr Mem Type Catalog 0001 met 10 Consumed ICRS3CPU3G4 0081 0144 0 2 Consumed ICE93DSM302 0145 0208 0 3 Consumed ICE93DSM302 0209 0272 0 4 Consumed ICES3DSM302 Total ss 0272 Highest 0272 Limit 2046 Each row provides reference point assignments for a specific module The columns are configured as follows e Overlap By default non fatal overlaps are identified in blue text and fatal overlaps are identified in red text e Start Displays the starting reference point assignment for the module e End Displays the ending reference point assignment for the module e Addr Displays the module s Rack Slot address in the form R S where O Ris the relative rack number 0 indicates first or main rack O Sis the relative slot number within the assigned rack 0 indicates the leftmost slot e Mem Type Identifies whether the module produces or consumes data in the allocated memory area e Catalog Display s the module s catalog number GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 47 Hardware Configuration Log View HWC offers a logging facility which records and maintains a history of HWC events and status information The data is saved in a separate log file on the PC hard disk and may be accessed through multiple edit sessions The default size of the log file default is IMB If the log data exceeds this size the oldest log information is overwritten with new log data Mar 04 1999 05 52 21 HWE
144. duce a warning at syntax check Global variables contained in a deleted block are not deleted from the Variable Declaration Table but local variables are To delete the contents of the MAIN block 1 Open the folder from which you wish to delete the contents of _MAIN Select _MAIN in the Folder Browser 2 Press the Delete key or click the delete toolbar button x You will be prompted that the contents of _MAIN will be cleared 3 Click OK _MAIN is cleared of all logic and the Block Description is cleared Other blocks in the folder are kept intact and are unaffected by this operation Variables local to MAIN are deleted Global variables are not deleted from the Variable Declaration Table 3 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D saving a Block VersaPro allows you to save the selected block to its current location If the VDT or the Folder Browser have changed they are also saved To save a block 1 Select the block you wish to save 2 From the File menu choose Save This option is available only if the selected block has changed since the last save The active block and any changed items VDT folder are saved Closing Blocks You may wish to close a selected block or close all open blocks but leave other windows for example the VDT and Folder Browser open e To close a block Select the block you want to close From the File Menu choose Close The selected block will cl
145. e Revisions Unsupported CPU models Warn if Store to PLC with LM90 folder Block Locking Unlocking other than via an import or load Online Use Tables Print Header Footer Auto backup Find local scope variables Size of block reported to the Information Window R upper limit change Serial number provided in Help About box Site licensing GFK 1670D iii Preface Related Information Manuals GFK 1645 GFK 1504 GFK 1503 GFK 1873 GFK 1411 GFK 1065 GFK 0356 GFK 1742 GFK 1192 GFK 1527 GFK 0827 GFK 0646 GFK 1541 GFK 0582 Other VersaMax Micro PLCs User s Manual VersaMax Modules Power Supplies and Carriers VersaMax PLC User s Manual VersaMax Station Manager Manual Series 90 30 System Manual Series 90 30 Micro PLC User s Manual Series 90 30 Programmable Controller Installation Manual Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual Series 90 70 System Manual Series 90 70 Enhanced Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User s Guide Series 90 70 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User s Guide C Programmer s Toolkit for the Series 90 PLCs User s Manual TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC User s Manual Series 90 PLC Serial Communications User s Manual GE Fanuc http www gefanuc com GE Fanuc PLC Hotline Fax on Demand System FaxLink GE Fanuc PLC Hotline Telephone Number 804 978 5824 1 800 GE Fanuc 1 800 433 2682 Internation
146. e Secondary configuration to the Secondary PLC create a new VersaPro folder and import the Sedondary Configuration from the original folder File gt Import Hardware Configuration Folder in HWC menu Connect to the Secondary PLC and store this Configuration to the Secondary PLC as described in steps 1 6 Note Both folders created as described above should be maintained to be able to use the Redundant 7 16 system VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Configuring the Genius Redundant System Genius Redundancy Types There are five types of redundant Genius systems These are sometimes used in conjunction with CPU redundancy schemes to provide additional protection against component failure This type of system is called CPU Redundancy Over Genius Dual Bus Redundancy Paired GBC Internal Dual Bus Redundancy Paired GBC External Dual GBC Redundancy Paired GBC Internal Dual GBC Redundancy Paired GBC External Dual Bus and Dual GBC Redundancy General Procedure for Configuring the Genius Redundant System GFK 1670D 1 From the Redundancy menu select Wizard Note that for Paired GBC External systems two open rack slots must be available in this PLC for the GBCs although the Paired GBC may be in another rack 2 Inthe Wizards window select Add GBCs for Genius Redundancy and click the Next button 3 Select a redundancy scheme and click Next Dual Bus one PLC Dual Bus Redundancy
147. e VersaPro Standard Edition license was successtully transtered out to Hoppe This system has been granted a 4 day tral license You have 4 days to enjoy your new YersaPro Standard Edition product After the 4 day tial pernod please use the Register Now tool found In the GE Fanuc Sottware VersaPro program group to register and fully license YersaPro Standard Edition Now insert the transfer floppy into the unlicensed machine and transfer in the license Or Message 2 This message appears when the licensed machine contains multiple licenses and shows how many licenses remain Information _ i The YersaPro Standard Edition license was successtully transfered out to floppy This system has 49 remaining licenses Now insert the transfer floppy into the unlicensed machine and transter in the license You are finished using this machine Return to the unlicensed machine with the licensed floppy disk to proceed with Step 3 Transfer In GFK 1670D Appendix C VersaPro License Transfer Procedure C 5 Step 3 Transfer In performed on the unlicensed machine The Transfer In License dialog should still be visible Click the Transfer Authorization In by Floppy button Insert the licensed floppy disk into the floppy drive and click the OK button Select Leg y IAH The following message indicates a successful license transfer Click the OK button to exit the Register Now program You are now
148. e an Ethernet connection Communications Setup To define communications parameters for the rack system select Communications Setup from the Tools menu The CCU will open If a password has been defined for the Communication Configuration Utility the Password dialog box will appear Enter your password and press OK to continue The main screen of the Communication Configuration Utility will appear When configuring a Device in the CCU for use with a GNIU or PNIU you should assign a Name and default Port Port Type should be set to SNP_SERIAL All other fields should be left at their default values When configuring a Device for use with an ENIU you should assign a Name default Port and IP address Port Type should be set to TCPIP_ETH GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 29 Storing RIO Configuration To transfer the configuration data to the associated Rack System 1 Choose Load Store Verify in the Tools menu If the configuration has not been saved the message Please save this rack system first will appear followed by the Save As dialog box You must save the rack system once before the Load Store Verify dialog box can be opened After you have saved the rack system once auto saves will be performed when this command is invoked 2 In the Load Store Verify Hardware Configuration dialog box select a Device and a Port Load Store Verifty Hardware Configuration Device DEFAULT NIUExample
149. e based on the LD BOOL 100300 l domaoi ST_EOOL SM00113 M00113 meee POLL LON BOOL M00113 M00113 JMFC LABEL LD BOOL ALON lt S00007 ma The Ie T I m TIT Variable Declaration Table Lists all variables which can be used in your IL logic System Temporary Heme pe Len Address Des Stor eem ow poa p feos Joana amn nione r feo oa a Global Locali Al The IL Editor contains the following columns fields Label Displays a label that can be referenced by a JUMP instruction Instruction Displays the function name Instructions are entered by clicking on the Instruction field and then typing or selecting from the drop down list Operand Displays the variables or constants used by the instruction Operands are entered by clicking on the field and then typing or selecting from the drop down list This list only displays variables appropriate to this type of instruction Reference Address Displays the memory location of the operand Value The actual value of the operand in the PLC Comment Displays an optional comment about the instruction VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Customizing the IL Editor Display You can customize font selection and color for the IL Editor Perform the following steps to customize the display 1 From the Folder Browser click the Tools menu and select Options The Options dialog box will appear
150. e is only used in one location in the program VersaPro will go unequal with the PLC after a Check All or a Verify because VersaPro does not update the PLC to the new highest reference used in order to minimize the time to make a Word for Word change To gain equality you must store the program to the PLC 10 18 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Loading a folder to Your Computer 2 You can load hardware configuration logic or stored overridden values from the PLC to your PC To load a folder from the PLC to your computer follow these steps 1 Confirm that you are connected to the PLC The VersaPro status bar should indicate Connected If the status bar is not visible press Ctrl 0 2 Click the Load button a or select the PLC menu and choose Load The Load Folder from PLC dialog box will appear Load Folder from PLC Options Load hardware configuration fram PLC Cancel i I Load logic from PLC Load overiddenstored values from PLC k Help 3 Select the components that you want to load Choose from hardware configuration and motion logic and stored overridden values 4 To begin the load procedure click the Load button 5 The selected information will be loaded from the PLC The Information Window will display the results of the load operation If the load is successful a message box will display Load from PLC Completed Note You cannot load Ethe
151. e negative contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 9 Description Effect on Accumulator ST_INT Variable or Ref Address Variable Integer Accumulator ST_DINT Variable Double Integer Accumulator ST_REAL Variable Real Accumulator ST_WORD Variable Word Accumulator Store the contents of the Integer Double Integer Real or Word Accumulator to the variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Discrete Variable or Ref Set Coil Variable Boolean Accumulator Address Store the contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Set Coil Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Reset Coil Variable Boolean Accumulator Address Store the contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Reset Coil Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Negative Transition Variable Boolean Accumulator Address Store the contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Negative Transition Coil Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean Discrete Variable or Ref Positive Transition Variable Boolean Accumulator Store the contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Positive Transition Coil Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean Accumulator NOT Accumulator
152. ecome part of the hardware configuration and are Stored to the PLC with the other configuration information For additional information about configuring and programming the DSM314 refer to the Motion Mate DSM3 14 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1742 GFK 1670D 9 1 Chapter Contents Setting Motion Program Local Logic Editor Options Using the Motion Program Editor Using the Local Logic Editor Using the Local Logic Variable Table LLVT Saving Motion Local Logic Programs Printing Motion Local Logic Programs Storing Motion Programs and Subroutines to the PLC Restoring Motion and Local Logic Blocks Using the Cam Editor Setting Motion Program Local Logic Editor Options 9 2 Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears Select the MP LL Editors Tab Select the tab and auto indent options you want and click OK VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Using the Motion Program Editor To Open the Motion Program Editor e Click File on the menu bar select New Motion Motion Program e The Create New Motion Program dialog box will appear Create New Motion Program Es Name Mationt Description Cancel A new Motion program mi Help Motion Module Type e Type the motion program Name and Description If more than one motion module type is available in the drop down listbox select the motion module type tha
153. ect the File menu and choose Save or click the Save button i within the Fault Table window 3 In the Save As dialog box type the file name for the fault data If you previously saved fault information the new data will be saved to the same file name 11 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Clearing the Fault Table You can clear the entire fault table by pressing F9 or selecting Clear Table from the Edit menu Clearing faults also clears latched fault indications in all connected logged in Genius blocks If you select Clear Table to clear the fault table the fault bit in the PLC is reset and you can put the PLC back into run mode If you select Clear Entry the fault bit is NOT reset and you cannot place the PLC in run mode Clearing the fault table removes the faults However it does not fix the underlying problem that generated the fault Clearing the fault table will allow the PLC to be put in Run mode even though the fault condition may still exist If the condition that caused the fault still exists the fault may be reported again after storing the configuration cycling power to the PLC or during a Stop to Run transition Note Clearing the fault table does clear fault conditions in the block at the same time the I O fault table is cleared Unlike Genius circuit faults an I O fault is not logged if it persists after the fault table is cleared After clearing a fault table it is poss
154. ed The floppy disk does not need to be reformatted Step 1 Register Machine performed on the unlicensed machine To start the Register Now Program go to the Windows Start menu and choose Programs GE Fanuc Software VersaPro RegisterNow Click the Next button on the Welcome dialog Welcome to the YersaPro Register Howl program This program will license YersaPro Professional Edition on your computer Itis strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING Thi program i protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the masimum extent possible under law C 1 Click the Yes button on the Software License Agreement dialog ee iF Click the Transfer In License button on the License VersaPro dialog Te YersaPro j VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 Software TE Agreement Ea GFK 1670D Click the Register Floppy for Transfer In button on the Transfer In License dialog eee PIE EA Enter a floppy disk into the floppy drive and click the OK button The floppy disk doesn t have to be clean The following message will ap
155. ed from elements but the elements to which these variables had been assigned are not removed e In Instruction List blocks the names of deleted variables are removed from the Operand column and their addressees are removed from the Reference Address column but the relays and instructions to which these variables had been assigned are not removed Note In order for a single variable to be deleted every field in the variable the entire row must be selected If every field is not selected when the deletion is performed the selected fields are cleared but the variable remains in existence To clear the Variable Declaration Table 1 Highlight the Variable Declaration Table in the Folder Browser 2 Choose Delete from the Edit or the Context Sensitive menu or press the Delete key A confirmation message appears asking if you are sure you want to erase all variables from the program 3 Click OK to delete all variables Otherwise click Cancel e All global and local variables are deleted from the VDT No variables remain on the Global Local or All tables e All variables are removed from program logic e System variables remain on the System table They can never be deleted Saving Edits in the VDT To save the Declaration Table 1 From the Variable Declaration Table click the Save Folder button on the toolbar El choose Save from the File or the Context Sensitive menu or press Ctrl S 2 VDT data is saved Note I
156. ed into the table If fewer variables reside on the clipboard than have been selected to be overwritten as many of the selected variables as possible are overwritten and the rest are deleted When you paste to a second instance of a VVT a new variable is created in the VDT If collisions occur when creating variables in the VDT an error message appears describing the problem Click OK A dialog appears allowing you to correct the problem Correct the problem Row validation continues for other variables If you cancel the entire paste is cancelled To drag and drop cut in a VVT oy be ge ee Open the VVT from which you wish to cut a variable entry or entries Select at least one cell within each row that you wish to cut Position the mouse arrow over the selected row Press and hold the primary mouse button Move the variable or cell to the appropriate area A graphical representation of the selected area is displayed to indicate a selection is being dragged This representation changes dynamically when you drag between two instances of the VVT which have different cell dimensions To drop the selection release the mouse button If it is valid in the new location the selected variable or cell is removed from the original position and placed in the new position If it is not valid the drag and drop operation is cancelled To drag and drop copy in a VVT 8 12 oF eh eee ee 2 Open the VVT from which you wish to cut a
157. eees 6 17 Variable Resolution cccccccossscssscssccssccesccesccesccesccescccscccscccscceses 6 18 Contents ix Contents Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware ssssecssecsssecsssecsssecsseeccseecsseessseesssee 7 1 Accessing Hardware Configuration AMi EERE A 7 2 Hardware Configuration Too bar cccccceccccsscccseeeeeeeeeeaeseeaeneeeaes 7 3 Usine the Parameter OF se soca scpcoset cospcmneepsvesetanoaneseseerntensencees 7 3 Me UMA TG EE N E EE A N EE ahd A E A E EOE 7 4 MVNO AR SS sas aee ten trsn A E anlemmesaceeaanitons 7 5 Ot INOW CAI OM iacaya not nasenc stan secant antaemanaiiutarauinancin ant ines enue Mast aciatenataspanateet 7 5 Oe i ST O a E 7 6 SHOGUCUEINCy S 19r HW C eean an sansctinneswdananeanetunecmnesnceraraen 7 6 Setting Options in Hardware Configuration cccccseeeeeseeeeeeeeees 7 7 Configuring a Series 90 30 or 90 70 Rack ssccccssssccsssscceesees 7 8 Chane ime Rack Type eeren EE A 7 8 Changing Configuring Power Supply and CPU sssenseeeseseeesssseeses 7 9 Conne rmne a Power SUD ONY viexat ce nrctticceceonsresantncmsatoneanpetaencaesanunansetnnenmaetasnenennnennes 7 9 CO TINO A PNG sceiceicca sence are nasiate sect cuiueacarcieeaacteimsnueacsuees tain engeosinacataatentennenencens 7 9 Adding Configuring Rack Modules cccccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeneneeeaes 7 10 Configuring Expansion Racks cccceccccseseceeeecceeseeaeeeeeeeseeaeeeens 7 10 Pelenin Rack Modules i ccsace ss
158. en e e E tere Tere 2 19 Unilockn a Poldo eea a ates teashten 2 21 Chane ine Folder Properties aicinn i a E N 2 22 Printing Your Program sscssecsseecscecssecseecssecssecsseossecsseosseesseoo 2 23 Pinme a Repon O tae 2 23 Printing Logic Variable Declaration Table or Information Window COD UG oes neta ere pa eee cee ee ea ee 2 25 Custom Header Footer Formatting ccccccescccseseceeseeeeeseeaeseens 2 25 Working With BIOCKS ssccccsssccssscccsssccssscccssccccsscccssscossscoees 3 1 Creating Inserting and Opening Blocks ccc eeccccecceeneeeeeeeeeeees 3 2 CTCALNG a SU MLOULING 145s ea aceiartcat tea utgadtesanid shania be iaancvatacntds ths tend vabacnte shana arehioa 3 2 Creatine amir xtermal BlOCK 4 dsicb secscrarcbabcbaraeahsdrs bodebencoadabasd incbusunedeatasiecsiwewe 3 3 90 30 Timed Interrupt Block Name Requirements ccccccsesceceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 3 4 Namie Field Restrictions seisin ninais nia a i a 3 4 Description Field RestrictonS isesiserien naa ee ee 3 4 Inserting a Block from Another Foldet cccceccccseccccseecceeeeceeseeseneeeaeseeseneeenes 3 5 Openin ta Blockera O ee ene E eee ere Eaa 3 6 Maximum Block SIZ anre EA E A OE 3 7 Inserting and Editing ODJects srrcceerioniiss rinis 3 7 Working with Blocks and Objects in the Folder Browser 3 8 Arran sime BLOCKS ssa ai oa sls Cita sc eas vail salon ce soe EEEN shoud oul dee ceeecoa sag oaea see 3 8 Viewing and
159. er 90 before release 6 will need to be converted to release 6 before importing For details see Importing Logicmaster Folders Earlier than Release 6 0 on page 2 7 VersaPro imports the hardware configuration before it imports the logic VersaPro imports locked Control or Logicmaster 90 blocks A program originally created with the HHP cannot be imported from Logicmaster to VersaPro when configured with a VersaMax Series 90 70 or high end Series 90 30 CPU You must first import the low end 90 30 Logicmaster program to VersaPro and then convert to the high end 90 30 CPU within VersaPro 1 Click the New Folder button al choose New Folder from the File menu or press Ctrl N The New Folder Wizard will appear a Folder Name E fen Location N er Folder Description import from LM30 folder Chand 4 Back Finish Cancel e In the Folder Name field type a name for the new folder A folder name is required e If you want to save the new folder to a location different from the default click on the Browse button opposite the Location field e Enter a folder description in the Folder Description field You may enter up to 64 characters This field is optional 2 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Choose One C Empty Folder Default Based on Existing YersaPro Folder port Logicmaster 30 C Import Control Ineude sE TOO From C
160. ere no mouse interaction is required This section describes the various ways you can enter instructions into your program Entering Instructions using the Function Toolbar The Function toolbar is used to select and add function blocks to your LD program The Function Toolbar can be displayed in either of two forms The compact form which requires less room on the screen and the expanded form which displays all the groups and their functions Selecting Functions Using the Function Toolbar Compact 4 6 The Function Toolbar displayed in compact form consists of a Group combo box an Instruction combo box and a Function Drop button To select Compact form select the View Menu choose Function Toolbars gt Compact The function toolbar will appear above the LD Editor window Data Move bi BLE CLA_WORD al All Function Groups KLE CLH WUHU Bit Operations JBLKMOW_INT Booleans 3 BLEMO AREAL Controls JBLKMOY WORD Conversion 7COMM AE MOVE _BOOL aMOVE_INT iMOVE_REAL MOYE WORD i SHFR_BIT aSHFR WORD Function Drop Button Click button to select function then click in the editor window to drop the function into your LD program Data Move Numerical Relational Special Timer Functions Shows instructions available for the active Function Groups Function Group Click the arrow to select a specific function group or to view all function gr
161. erify Flash Memory dialog box will appear Read Write Verify Flash Memory ES select tems for operation Read l Hardware Configuration Write i Logic Verity Stored Overridden Values Memory type amp Flash EEPROM Ef Ergan store i ee 3 Select the folder components you want for the flash operation You can select individual components by clicking on them 4 Under Memory Type select Flash EEPROM 5 Select the flash operation by clicking the appropriate button e To read from Flash memory to the CPU click the Read button e To write from the CPU to Flash memory click the Write button e To verify that the program data in Flash memory matches that in the CPU click the Verify button 6 When the operation is complete a message box will indicated success or error 10 22 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Reading Writing Verifying the EZ Program Store Device The VersaMax EZ Program Store device stores configuration and logic and provides the ability to update configuration and logic in a PLC without the need for a programmer An end user can update a PLC by connecting the EZ Program Store device to the RS 485 port on the PLC and pressing the momentary contact switch on the device PLC must not be scanning I O The user can specify whether the data is written only to the PLC s RAM or also to flash memory To perform read write or verify operat
162. ernet or modem connection depending on the capabilities of the PLC Connections are made by identifying a device and selecting a port The device specifies information necessary to successfully connect including the default PC communication port target PLC type PLC SNP address and PLC IP address The port identifies the PC port used to initiate communications to the PLC This section describes the various ways to connect to the PLC Direct Serial Port Multidrop Modem and TCIP IP Direct Serial Port Connection 10 4 The simplest method of communicating with the PLC 1s a direct SNP connection To make it easy to use a direct SNP connection a preconfigured device name DEFAULT is provided DEFAULT is designed to be used for a direct connection from COM 1 on the PC to the built in SNP port on the PLC This device will work for any SNP direct connection using default protocol settings 19200 odd parity 1 stop bit To connect directly from COMI on your PC follow these steps 1 Connect the serial cable from COM1 on your PC to the RS 232 RS 485 converter on your PLC 2 Select the PLC menu and choose Connect The Connect dialog box will appear This dialog box is used to select a device and port to initiate communication with the PLC Connect SNP Serial E ListAll Devices Cancel E Help gi MOTFROG_DEVICE MOTFROG_FORT port 1 P utomatic Port selection 3 Select Device
163. es the selected item to the Clipboard Copies the selected element s as either a bitmap image or as text to the Clipboard Pastes the Clipboard contents to the selected area Deletes selected item s Selects all items Allows you to Find and Replace a variable Name or Address a Call to a Subroutine or a Jump Label or MCR END_MCR pair in logic Find Next F3 Finds next item of defined search criteria Find In Blocks Finds a particular global or system variable by Name or Address Ctrl F10 or a Call to a Subroutine in blocks Go to Ctrl G Allows you to go to a row in IL logic or a rung in LD logic Go to Variable Allows you to got to a variable in the VDT Ctrl F11 Go to Next Coil Alt F3 In the LD editor moves the cursor to the next coil with the same name as the selected reference Properties Alt Enter Submenu of options related to Properties VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Edit Properties Submenu Block Alt Enter Allows you to edit the properties of the selected Ladder Diagram Instruction Logic subroutine C program Motion program Local Logic program or Cam program block Properties depend on the type of block Folder Alt Enter Allows you to view folder properties You can edit folder description and nickname and specify a header and or footer for the folder printout Variable Table Alt Allows you to specify temporary and conversion var
164. es to a specified location Print the block that has focus Save the block or table that has focus Redo the previously undone action Undo the last action Cut the selection to the Clipboard Display help for clicked on buttons menus and windows Insert Clipboard contents To perform operations in the LD editor CTRL CTRL CTRL ALT F3 CTRL lt CTRL gt CTRL 7T CTRL Decrease font size Increase font size Increase font size Navigate to the next coil Draw erase horizontal shunt to the left Draw horizontal shunt to the right Draw vertical shunt up Draw vertical shunt down Click right mouse button and drag to target location Connect two cells with a wire To perform operations in the LD and IL editors F2 Toggle edit mode off on F3 Find next item of defined search criteria CTRL F10 Find specified item in blocks in folder CTRL F11 Go to variable in Variable Declaration Table Move left by cell gt Move right by cell T Move up by cell L Move down by cell SHIFT lt Increase decrease selection area to left SHF T Increase decrease selection area to right SHIFT Increase decrease selection area up SHIFT Increase decrease selection area down HOME If edit mode is off focus moves to the current row s first cell the first time Home is pressed Pressing Home again moves focus and to the entire rung If edit mode is on in the current cell the cursor moves to t
165. eseecseesee B 2 RSA TNEI CE eae E E A A B 2 Cableand Connector SpeCihCatlONnSsy c veut ea a E B 3 dE Oe ole aL ON aa r a N a e B 4 IBM A TX F Serial POP yerai B 5 RS 232 RS 485 COUN CI ascris sasienesstiaccenc aimee saisonan irene ianiai aeii B 5 Serial Cable Dia Oras a a in eaesieieens B 6 RS 232 Point to Point CONNECTION ccccccceccceeecceecceeecceeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeceaeeeees B 6 Multidrop Onn Cini 3s fesetconcesnek eA el acta lt hon guna diwhieee chan dtoacues B 7 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Contents Miniconvert r Kiles eaaa B 8 Description ot MMiconverte esesten on taxeniveciwatinswonttemi B 8 Pin Assionments RS 232 Por viedccussiesierdaaunssieeciadeiaepteleseinasiaonedsiasiesdecliys B 9 Pin Assromments R342 2 Pom wisest dsatccsescnidiesk jouhende eentdessgoupsebesantduvageasersniaanseabeees B 9 System CONMSULATIONS siaaa a DES B 10 Cable Diagrams Point To Po int ce ecccceececeeeeeeseeeeneeeaeees B 10 Miniconverter Specifications cccccsscccsesecceseceeeseceeceeeeseeeeseens B 11 Appendix C VersaPro License Transfer Procedure sscccssssccsssscceseses C 1 Appendix D VersaPro Keyboard Quick Reference Guide csssssoeeees D 1 GFK 1670D Contents xvii Chapter l Introduction Welcome to VersaPro Welcome to VersaPro GE Fanuc s Windows based programming software for the Series 90 70 Series 90 30 and VersaMax
166. esigned for 35mm DIN rail or panel mounting The sample system shown below has a main module required and one Expansion Unit ik WhMMicro ee oe oak eu ets ety Pil ae Ue oes pete ee Goo i Be 0 ee 0000m ii OO IC200UEXO1 17012 6 IN 6 OUT ACHUES011 OCHE ADC Relay Local Rack Not Saved tb Rack Module Operations GFK 1670D To replace a main module IC200UDRO05 010 is the default select Replace Module or Replace CPU from the context sensitive menu or select Replace CPU from the Edit Rack Operations submenu To add an Expansion Unit to the system select Add Module from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu The Expansion Unit is added to the end of the chain To replace an Expansion Unit select the Expansion Unit and choose Replace Module from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu To remove an Expansion Unit from the system select Delete Module from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Module Operations submenu Only the last expansion unit in the chain can be deleted Note The main module cannot be deleted from the system To remove all Expansion Units from the system select Clear Rack from the context sensitive menu or from the Edit Rack Operations submenu When you add or replace a module the Parameter Editor window will appear Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 43 Counter Pulse Width Modulation and Pulse Train Out
167. established a connection to the PLC you can transfer Folders between your computer and the PLC This section covers the following e Storing a folder from your PC to the PLC e Loading a folder from the PLC to the PC e Verifying that a folder matches the one currently running in the PLC e Clearing items in the PLC e Performing read write operations on PLC flash memory Storing a Folder to the PLC amp You can store hardware configuration logic or stored overridden values to the PLC In most cases before storing to the PLC you will need to place the PLC in Stop mode You can perform a Run mode store only when you are storing certain program changes and the folder nickname matches the PLC nickname To place the PLC in Stop mode click the Stop toolbar button m or go to the PLC menu and choose Stop PLC To store the current Folder from your computer to the connected PLC follow these steps 1 Confirm that you are connected the PLC The VersaPro status bar should indicate Connected If the status bar is not visible press Ctrl 0 2 Click the Store Button ea or select the PLC menu and choose Store The Store Folder to PLC dialog box will appear ptions W Store logicto PLE Store stored overridden values to PLC Store hardware configuration and motion to PLC e Cancel s GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 17 3 Select the folder components you want to store to the PLC hardware configur
168. eteness sufficiency or usefulness of the information contained herein No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply The following are trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc Alarm Master Genius PROMACRO Series Six CIMPLICITY Helpmate PowerMotion Series Three CIMPLICITY 90 ADS Logicmaster PowerTRAC VersaMax CIMSTAR Modelmaster Series 90 VersaPro Field Control Motion Mate Series Five VuMaster GEnet ProLoop Series One Workmaster Copyright 1999 2004 GE Fanuc Automation North America Inc All Rights Reserved Preface This manual describes the features that are used to program Series 90 30 Series 90 70 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro and Series 90 Micro PLCs using the VersaPro programming software Version 2 00 Revisions to This Manual This manual and the product online help have been updated to reflect the new features provided by Version 2 00 New features include Support for Series 90 70 PLCs including Genius redundancy and CPU redundancy over Genius Refer to the Important Product Information document GFK 1671K or later for a complete list of features supported Support for additional VersaMax I O modules and Series 90 30 power supply modules Refer to GFK 1671K or later for a list Usability enhancements SNF VCD Import able to swap variable names Multiple instances of VersaPro on the same computer simultaneously communicating to PLCs Minimum supported Firmwar
169. eter values are converted to lowercase unless enclosed in a pair of double quotes The enclosing quotes are removed and the parameter value is not converted to lowercase e The parameter value data format depends upon the parameter Numeric parameters are entered in decimal or hexadecimal format Hexadecimal values must be terminated with an h or H character e IP address parameters must be entered in standard dotted decimal format Example 10 0 0 1 e The semicolon character delimits comments All characters in the line following a semicolon are ignored e Blank lines are ignored Sample Advanced User Parameter File AUP_0_0 stpasswd system g0l_udp 4741H g0l_addr 224 0 7 121 g02_udp 4742H g0l_addr 224 0 7 122 This is a comment The CPUEO5 advanced user parameters are similar to CPU364 advanced user parameters Additional information for the CPU364 is provided in the TCP IP Ethernet Communications for the Series 90 PLC GFK 1541 For the CPUEOS refer to the VersaMax Station Manager Manual GFK 1873 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Configuring VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs A VersaMax Micro PLC system consists of a main module and up to four optional Expansion Units The VersaMax Nano PLC does not support Expansion Units The main module contains CPU I O and HSC PWM PTO functions Expansion Units provide I O functions only The compact lightweight units are d
170. exporting an SNF file 2 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 5 Click Finish The content of the Control folder is imported into the new folder The logic 1s checked for correct syntax e If syntax errors are found they are reported in the Information Window and the process is aborted The new folder is not created e If no syntax errors are found the folder is populated with the logic and hardware configuration from the Control folder Rules for Folder Names and Nickname This section describes naming conventions and rules for new folders and folder nicknames Rules for Folder Names The following rules apply to folder names for new VersaPro folders e A folder name may be no longer than 103 characters e The following characters may not be used in a folder name period backslash forward slash colon asterisk question mark lt less than gt greater than vertical bar quotation mark Rules for Folder Nicknames The Folder Nickname or Program Name is the name used when storing the folder to the PLC Both the Series 90 30 and VersaMax PLCs will recognize a nickname that 1s 7 characters or less e A nickname must be 7 characters or less e The first character of a nickname must be a letter e The remaining characters may be letters digits or the underscore character i e An underscore may not appear directly after an underscore e When
171. ext sensitive menu or from the Edit Rack Operations menu Clearing the Rack for Multiple Remote Rack Systems When you select this option with focus on the Main rack the transmitter will not be cleared If you select this option with focus on expansion rack it clears all the modules except the Power Supply And Receiver Integrated unit VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Configuring Receiver Parameters This option displays the Receiver parameters for the selected Expansion rack The Receiver units have no configurable parameters Loading VersaMax Hardware Configurations For general information on loading a hardware configuration see Loading a Folder to Your Computer in Chapter 10 VersaMax Modules with Shared IDs When the configuration is loaded from a rack system HWC uses the hardware module ID to determine the correct module catalog number and description However some VersaMax modules share the same module IDs When a VersaMax rack system containing these modules is auto configured and the configuration is loaded an incorrect catalog number and description may be displayed You will need to select the correct module from the modules catalog and store it to the rack system After storing the configuration you will be able to load the configuration properly The following modules share hardware module IDs IC200MDL650 loads as IC200MDL636 IC200MDL750 loads as IC200MDL742 IC200MDL3
172. f the log view To display or hide the log view select the View menu and click Log View 7 48 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Hardware Configuration Power Consumption View The Power view displays current power consumption statistics for the power supply that is providing power to the currently selected module These statistics are provided to assist you in monitoring the power requirements of the I O modules you are configuring in the individual racks To enable or disable docking choose Dock from the popup menu To change the color scheme see Error Notification Following is a summary description of the power consumption statistics displayed e The bar graph shows the percentage of power used for each voltage and the total The bar graphs show the percentage of power used for each voltage and for Series 90 30 racks the percentage of total system power used e For VersaMax racks Used and Supplied power statistics are shown in Amps e For Series 90 30 racks Used Supplied power statistics are shown in Watts e AVL Ext available externally displays the external power available at each voltage and the total available external power in Watts Series 90 30 systems only Power Consumption Limit Calculations The Power view displays graphs showing amount of consumption for the various voltages produced by the power supply In addition for Series 90 30 racks the graph shows a system Total gra
173. fer to Chapter 5 of the Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual GFK 1065 Configuring Averaging Filter for Analog Input Potentiometers VersaMax Micro PLCs have two potentiometers located below the Run Stop switch that can be used to manually set input values that are stored in AI16 and AI17 The number of samples to be averaged can be controlled by the application program By default 16 samples will be averaged For details on configuring and using this feature refer to Chapter 8 of the Series 90 Micro PLC User s Manual GFK 1065 7 46 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Hardware Configuration Reference View HWC Reference View provides information about references allocated when modules are added to the rack system This view is updated each time an I O or specialty module is added to or deleted from the system The Reference View is a dockable view which means that you can select it with your mouse and move it anywhere in the HWC main window You can control display of the reference view To display or hide the reference view select the View menu and click Reference View The reference view maintains a separate tab for each reference type used in HWC I PQ WAI WAQ G M PR To view reference information for a specific reference type click the tab that corresponds to that reference type Al AQ G I 2M Pach Ele ees oss Ses ease oa Overlap start End Ad
174. folder launch VersaPro and perform the following steps 1 Click the New Folder button P choose New Folder from the File menu or press Ctrl N The New Folder Wizard will appear Folder Mame femti ee Location Folder Description o ersaPro folder for Versahax i PLCs Default langauge LD 4 Back Finish Cancel e In the Folder Name field type a name for the new folder A folder name is required e If you want to save the new folder to a location different from the default click on the Browse button opposite the Location field e Enter a folder description in the Folder Description field You may enter up to 64 characters This field is optional 2 Click the Next button The next screen of the New Folder Wizard will appear 2 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 3 Click the Based on Existing VersaPro Folder button then click the Browse button for the From field and in the Browse dialog box that appears locate the VersaPro folder upon which you wish to base this new folder 4 Click Finish The existing folder s structure and contents blocks VDT etc are duplicated in the new folder The Folder Browser appears displaying the new folder The _MAIN block will appear GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 5 To create a new folder importing a Logicmaster 90 Folder Notes Series 90 70 folders created in earlier versions of Logicmast
175. function blocks Instead reference the first word of the timer counter function block memory to access the current value CV 4 Do not use the power flow output of relational functions such as EQ NE GT etc 5 Confine the Main program to using no more than 64 program blocks plus _MAIN 6 Restrict program block sizes to 16K bytes or less 7 Do not use I O interrupt blocks and restrict timed interrupts to 1 unless converting to VersaMax which supports up to 16 I O or timed interrupt blocks 8 Do not use the L P or WGA through WGE memories 9 Limit MCRN nesting to eight levels 10 Do not use data flow between functions Instead store to a specific variable and then read that variable 11 Restrict LD topologies to conform to the more stringent 90 30 rules This may require the use of multiple LD rungs in place of a single LD rung e Do not use power flow around functions e When atransitional coil is used it must be the only coil in the rung GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 2 e Boolean subexpressions must be properly nested Do not branch into or out of a boolean subexpression The following logic provides an example of an improperly nested subexpression TOO sI00002 sI00003 idii i 100006 s0000 e Ifa rung contains a function it cannot contain any subpath starting from a vertical The following example shows an illegal subpath from a vertical 100001 171
176. g a discontinuous set of cells To drag and drop from the VDT to the LD or IL Editor 1 Open a block in the IL or LD Editor Open the Variable Declaration Table Select a variable in the VDT Position the mouse over the selected variable Press and hold down the primary mouse button oy a ey ae a Move the variable to the Operand field of an existing instruction in the IL Editor or to an element or operand in the LD Editor 7 Release the mouse button to drop the variable The variable becomes the operand for the selected instruction Details on Dropping a Variable into an Editor e When a selection is dropped it overwrites the existing cell e Variables may only be dropped on existing elements or operands e If the variable is invalid in its new location the entire drag and drop operation is cancelled e Multiple rows cannot be dragged and dropped from the VDT to the IL Editor No more than one row from the VDT may be dropped into the LD Editor GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 11 Variable Declaration Table Utilities VersaPro provides several utilities to sort variables delete variables as well as clear and save the VDT This section describes how to use the utilities supported by the VDT Sorting Variables VersaPro allows you to sort variables in the VDT in ascending or descending order according to any but the Stored Value column To sort variables in the VDT 1 Ope
177. g and drop to move a block to a different SBA on the Genius bus To move the controlling GBC you must edit its Serial Bus Address in the Parameter Editor window Cut Copy and Paste To perform these commands select a block and choose the command from the CSM or Edit menu Keyboard shortcuts Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 13 CPU Redundancy There are three types of basic CPU redundancy These redundant systems can be used in combination with Genius redundancy schemes For more information about redundant systems based on IC697CGR772 and IC697CGR93 refer to the Series 90 70 Enhanced Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User s Guide GFK 1527 For redundant systems based on IC697CPU780 refer to the Series 90 70 Hot Standby CPU Redundancy User s Guide GFK 0827 Single Bus with Preferred Master Uses a single Genius bus with bus controllers in each PLC The primary unit is always chosen as the active unit when the units initially synchronize GHS control strategy Single Bus with Floating Master Uses a single Genius bus with bus controllers in each PLC No switchover occurs on initial synchronization to make the primary unit the active unit GDB control strategy Dual Bus with Floating Master Uses dual buses with the bus controllers in each PLC No switchover occurs on initial synchronization Bus Switching Modules BSMs are required in accordance with configuration of
178. g modules share hardware module IDs IC200MDL650 loads as IC200MDL636 IC200MDL750 loads as C200MDL742 IC200MDL331 loads as IC200MDL329 IC200MDD844 loads as IC200MDD842 IC200MDL141 loads as IC200MDL140 Verifying RIO Configuration To verify the rack configuration 1 In the Load Store Verify Hardware Configuration dialog box select a Device and a Port 2 Click the Verify button The programming software will automatically connect to the NIU perform the verification and disconnect from the NIU The Log window will display the results of the operation GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 31 Clearing RIO Configuration This procedure clears the configuration and forces an autoconfiguration If you clear the NIU and then do a load from the NIU you will be loading a default configuration that will overwrite your existing configuration 1 In the Load Store Verify Hardware Configuration dialog box select a Device and a Port 2 Click the Clear button The programming software will automatically connect to the NIU clear the configuration disconnect and display the results in the Log Window 7 32 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Ethernet Global Data Configuration EGD allows one device the producer to transfer exchange data to one or more other devices the consumers at a regularly scheduled transfer rate EGD exchanges can be configured for a Series 90 30 CPU364 a VersaM
179. hange default serial port settings click the Ports tab highlight the PC port you want to modify COM1 through COMA and click Edit The Edit Port dialog box will appear Customize the port configuration to suit your application To access SNP timers click the Advanced button For details on SNP timers see page 10 5 Click OK to save changes for the port Edit Port Fort Selection Eun eent ii tea eae ia r Fort settings a TT Name COMI stopbits fi Pes Be i Type SNP_SERIAL prety ODD Baudrat hao Default Physical Port a 14200 Modem Turnaround a Help Time 1Orns a Advanced gt gt Associated 10 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Connecting to the PLC To connect to the PLC 1 In VersaPro select the PLC menu and choose Connect or click the Connect button m Bal on the PLC toolbar 2 Select the Device and Port configured in the CCU Click the Connect button to establish communications 3 When the connection is made the status information at the bottom of the screen will change to Connected TCP IP Ethernet Connection If a TCP IP Ethernet configuration has never been defined for a device or your PLC Ethernet Interface has not been configured follow the instructions in Configuring Your PLC and PLC Hardware Configuring Your PC and PLC Hardware Before connecting via TCP IP Ethernet you must set
180. he Default Hardware Configuration field Setting Full or Brief comments In the LD and IL Editors comments can be configured to be viewed in full or brief mode The default is to view comments in brief mode To change the default select the General Tab and check the Full Comments button Setting Syntax Check Turn off Warnings By default when VersaPro performs syntax checking on logic multiple coil usage warnings are displayed in the information window To suppress the warnings select the General tab and check the Turn Off Warnings box Enable SNF Auto Export This option causes variables to be automatically exported in SNF format when you create or edit variables and then save the VDT Only variables in the VDT with the EXT checkbox selected will be auto exported The snf file will be exported to the current folder any existing snf file with the same name will be overwritten Filename If Use Folder Name is not selected a filename is required This name follows the same naming rules as VersaPro folder names Use Folder Name default If this box is checked the exported filename will be foldername snf File Lock Timeout A lck lock file is generated at the same time as the snf file The Ick file is used to prevent reading or writing of the snf file while it is in use VersaPro will attempt to access the lck file for the number of seconds specified in this field Valid values are from 1 to 60 seconds Setting the n
181. he Destination Subnet ID field enter the subnet ID in dotted decimal format of the remote subnet to which you wish to route data for example 4 12 20 0 In the Destination Subnet Mask field enter the subnet mask associated with that remote subnet for example 255 255 255 0 In the Next Hop IP Address field enter the IP address of the local gateway to which you wish to send the data for example 3 16 32 1 then click the OK button Subnet Subnet ID Subnet Mask The subnet mask is a mechanism to logically divide a large network into smaller subnets according to your local assignment of IP addresses to nodes on the network Nodes on the network which have their IP addresses alike for the bits specified in the subnet mask can talk to each other directly nodes whose IP addresses are not alike in these same bits must talk indirectly via an intermediate gateway or router As described in an appendix to your Ethernet module user manual the 32 bits of an IP address are divided between a net id part and a host id part The class of the IP address determines how many bits are in the net id and how many are in the host id In general the net id portion of the IP address on the left 1s assigned by the Internet authorities The host id on the right is assigned by your local network administrator Subnetting is locally optional and consists of designating some any number of the host id bits as a an extended net id or subnet id The ad
182. he Expansion Receiver type is None A power supply is not configured for the Expansion Rack until an Expansion Receiver is configured There are three ways you can configure an Expansion Receiver e By adding any base unit in the expansion rack A Non Isolated Receiver Unit will be configured by default e By right clicking on the rack and selecting a Receiver Unit from the Expansion Receiver submenu e By choosing a Receiver Unit from the Edit submenu Expansion Receiver To deactivate the unit select None from the Expansion Receiver submenu This option is not available if the rack configuration contains one or more Carrier Base units Changing Receiver Type for Expansion Racks in Multiple Rack Systems The Power Supply And Receiver Integrated unit consists of IC200PWROO1 and IC200ERMO002 non isolated receiver by default For expansion racks in Multiple Remote Rack systems an isolated receiver IC200ERMOO1 can be selected To change the receiver choose Expansion Receiver from the Edit menu or the CSM Viewing Power Consumption Values To view the parameters for the power supply double click on the Power Supply and Receiver Integrated unit Power values for the receiver are shown in the parameter dialog of the receiver and the value is non editable Receiver power is included as part of the total power consumption of the main power supply To view the parameters for the receiver choose Configure Receiver Parameters from the cont
183. he File menu and choose Password CCU settings are stored in the GEF_CFG INI file located in the same directory as the GEF_CFG32 EXE application file If you have lost the password and need to remove it open GEF_CFG INI in a text editor such as Notepad Go to the Global_Parameters section near the end of the file and delete the line that contains PASSWORD XXXXXXXX where XXXXXXXX is a string of characters representing the encrypted password 10 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Modem Turnaround Time If you are not using a modem to communicate with a PLC the Modem Turnaround Time in the CCU Port tab must be set to 0 A non zero value for this parameter requires a CTS signal from the modem before data can be sent The Modem Turnaround Time parameter in the CPU hardware configuration can be non zero even if no modem is present However this will slow performance and is not recommended Because turnaround time is added to every communications request and several requests are usually required for an operation the turnaround time is multiplied requiring longer times for the timeout parameters Therefore if a nonzero Modem Turnaround Time is used you should increase the Connect Timeout and Request Timeout values in the CPU hardware configuration accordingly GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 3 Connecting to a PLC You can connect to a PLC from VersaPro over a serial Eth
184. he Power Supply cccccsescccseseceesceceeseceeseesesesseneens 7 21 Pins WHO GUC arici uariis a 7 21 Adding Power Supply Booster Bases cccccsccccsseecceeecceescenenscceessessuseseeeeens 7 21 Configuring a Power Supply for a Booster Base ccccccescecsseeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeees 7 22 Adding Configuring Modules cccccsescccssseceeececesecceneeeaeseeeeeseeseneeeseseeeeneees 7 22 Configuring Module Parameters ccccccescccseecceeeeecceeseceneeeseseceenseeeeseeeeneees 7 22 Deletine Rack MOGUICS enssins E reed E E EEA 7 23 Pelni Canosa a aN 7 23 EIE TTEA E E PE E A E A A E E A E E A 7 23 Configuring VersaMax Expansion Networks cccccsececceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeseeeaenes 7 23 Loading VersaMax Hardware Configurations ccccsseeeeeeeeees 7 27 VersaMax Modules with Shared NDS canainean E E Jezi Configuring a VersaMax Remote I O Rack essssecsssecsseecsseeso 7 28 Comme urine am NIU arn a ea eke inne 7 28 Contieurine the RIO RACK aranea e e 7 29 Load Store Verify RIO Configuration cccccseseceeeeeeeseeeeeeeees 7 29 COMMUNICATORS SOLU Dis nehan a N 7 29 Srne RIO Conu Surat ON cx occ tacud cence a ackuee at iecondbatwen N neces 7 30 Loading RIO Cont Sram OM iss ss dec islet ac ackonetes sewte destinestbdaeendoiuaba Jawnecoadwd oooa EREA 7 31 Verine RIO Come uration ints c5 s0 225 orwnan aa eacct iananeas eaesech eeenenaees 7 31 Clearing RIQ Conn suraviOn sasi
185. he booster Perform these steps to add a power supply booster base 1 To adda Power Supply Booster Base to the right of configured modules click the right mouse button and choose Add Base Carrier The Module Catalog will display To insert a Power Supply Booster base between two configured modules highlight the module which will be to the right of the new base click the right mouse button and choose Insert Base Carrier The Module Catalog will display 2 Click the Power Supply Booster Bases tab Click the catalog number to select the base then click the OK button 3 To configure the power supply click the right mouse button and choose Add Module Select the Power Supply from the list and click OK Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 21 Configuring a Power Supply for a Booster Base Power Supplies can be added throughout your VersaMax system To add or replace a configured power supply on a Booster Base 1 Double click the empty booster base For booster bases with configured power supplies click the right mouse button and select Replace Module The Power Supply Module Catalog dialog box will appear 2 Click the catalog number of the power supply you want to configure then click the OK button The Parameter Editor will display 3 You can view information about the power supply Click OK to complete power supply configuration Adding Configuring Modules Once a carrier is configured the module may be added to the system
186. he left of the first character in the field END If edit mode is off focus moves to the current row s last occupied cell the first time End is pressed Pressing End again moves focus to the row s last cell If edit mode is on in the current cell the cursor moves to the right of the last character in the field CTRL HOME Move to the first row s first cell CTRL END Moves to the last row s first cell TAB Move to right one cell SHIFT TAB Move to left one cell ENTER on an empty cell The Instruction dropdown list is activated As you type the instruction mnemonic VersaPro sorts the possible instructions for the specified location ENTER on a cell that contains an instruction or operand The Variable dropdown list is activated As you type the Variable name VersaPro sorts the possible variables that are valid for this context If the instruction is a comment it is placed in Edit mode SHIFT ENTER on a cell that contains an instruction or operand The Instruction dropdown list is activated As you type the instruction mnemonic VersaPro sorts the possible instructions for the specified location SPACEBAR Toggle selection on off CTRL SPACEBAR Toggle selection on off DELETE Delete the selection CTRL ENTER Exits a comment that has been placed in Edit mode lt Instruction Mnemonic gt lt Variable Name gt Enter an instruction and variable name at the same time i e NOCON Discrete VarOne lt Instruction Mnemoni
187. he selection over the desired cells or along the power rail over the desired rungs 5 To select non contiguous rungs hold down the Ctrl key while selecting rungs The desired rungs are selected To set a selection in the Ladder Editor using the keyboard 1 Make sure placement mode is off by pressing Esc 2 Select cells To select a single cell navigate to the desired cell and press the spacebar To select a group of cells navigate to a cell then hold down the Shift key while using navigation keys to move the selection over the desired area To select a single rung navigate to the power rail and press Ctrl the spacebar To select a contiguous group of rungs navigate to the power rail The entire rung is implicitly selected To select more rungs hold down the Shift key and use the up or down arrow keys to move the selection over contiguous rungs To select non contiguous rungs select a single rung hold down the Ctrl key navigate to another rung and press the spacebar The rungs are selected Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 15 Using Cut Copy Paste and Delete in the LD Editor In the LD Editor you can cut or copy rung s or cell s from one portion of a ladder to another portion or from one block to another without removing the variables included in those rungs or cells from the Variable Declaration Table You can also delete selected rungs or cells Logic cannot be pasted from LD blocks to IL blocks nor can
188. hether the Confirms that Shows sweep time PLC is in Stop or you are and logic equality Run mode and connected to status whether outputs the PLC are enabled or disabled More detailed information is available through the status information dialog box To view this information select the PLC menu and choose Status Info or press F4 The tabs of the Target Communications Window contain the following information e Memory Supplies CPU device information the currently stored program s name and CPU memory usage e Date Allows you to view change or synchronize date and time e Reference Displays sizes for all reference tables in the PLC CPU as well as the status of all point fault references e Protection Displays access level and OEM protection status Allows you to set access passwords and OEM key e Sweep Displays sweep modes and times When VersaPro is connected you can set the Sweep Mode and Constant Sweep Time while the PLC is in RUN mode This change will only affect the PLC until it is transitioned to STOP When the PLC is returned to RUN mode the default sweep mode takes effect Note Settings for this tab are stored in the PLC not in the program folder 10 24 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Viewing and Changing Date and Time To view the current PLC time and date select the Date tab If the CPU s date and time do not match the host computer s you can synchronize
189. hold the left mouse button and drag the module to the new slot To close a window press Ctrl F4 To Close HWC press Alt F4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Setting Options in Hardware Configuration To set HWC options go to the Tools menu and select Options To adjust the size and content of the HWC System Log enable Audit Trail Mode set the number of Undo Levels and select Error and Warning colors select the General Options tab Power Mormal Power Warning Text Error Text Warning To change the format of the Parameter Editor window and the mode for assigning the next reference select the Parameter Edit Options tab GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 7 Configuring a Series 90 30 or 90 70 Rack When you enter Hardware Configuration for the Series 90 30 the default view is the Rack Main The default 90 30 CPU model is the CPU351 The default 90 70 CPU model is the CPX772 EHC chan4_30h AAT File Edit View Window Tools Help Di Hae SI ASE Context Sensitive Menu Choices Main Rack 1 Rack 2 Rack 3 Rack 4 Rack 5 Rack E Rag Click the secondary mouse button to view list of available commands for the Rack Tabs Eoniaue Parameters lita add Module ie C pel pal mo Renate Maodule Pelete kiodule Change Rack Type Clear Rack Surety iteu Configure CPU Parameters eo A Replace CPU
190. iable or constant specified by the operand The LD operators also set the Type of the accumulator The ST Store operators are used to set the value of the variable specified by the operand to the contents of the accumulator The remainder of the operators manipulate the contents of the accumulator or perform an action based on the accumulator s value For the Math and Relational operators the type of the accumulator must be Integer Description Effect on Accumulator LD_BOOL Discrete Variable or Ref Accumulator Boolean Variable Address Load the contents of the Boolean variable into the Accumulator Accumulator Type set to Boolean LDN_BOOL Discrete Variable or Ref Accumulator NOT Variable Address Load the negative contents of the Boolean variable into the Accumulator Accumulator Type set to Boolean LD_INT Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Integer Variable constant Load the contents of the Integer variable into the Accumulator Accumulator Type set to Integer LD_ENO Accumulator Boolean ENO Load the contents of the ENO Enable Output from the last Function or Function Block call into the Accumulator Accumulator Type set to Boolean ST_BOOL Discrete Variable or Ref Variable Boolean Accumulator Address Store the contents of the Boolean Accumulator to the Boolean variable Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean STN_BOOL Discrete Variable or Ref Variable NOT Boolean Accumulator Address Store th
191. iables variables with a length greater than 1 display the address scope and value on subsequent lines under the first entry To Toggle or Override a Reference in an RVT To work online in the RVT connect to the PLC and perform the following steps to toggle and override references 1 8 14 Open the RVT Select the View menu and choose Monitoring gt All or Monitoring gt Active Window Place the cursor on an offset of the reference that you want to toggle or override Select the PLC menu and choose Toggle press the F12 key or click the Toggle button al The RVT Override Toggle Bit dialog box will appear To override press the F11 key or click the Override button The appropriate reference is toggled or overridden VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D To Write a Value to a Reference in an RVT 1 Open the RVT Select the View menu and choose Monitoring gt All or Monitoring gt Active Window 2 Place the cursor on an offset of the reference that you want to change 3 Select the PLC menu and choose Write Reference Value or click the Write Reference Value button l 4 Enter the value Click the OK button to accept The value is written to the reference address in the PLC GFK 1670D Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 15 Chapter Motion Programming 9 The Motion Mate DSM314 is a high performance easy to use multi axis motion control module that is highly
192. iables for Enter converting LD subroutines to IL and vice versa View Menu Option Button Action Toolbars Ctrl T a Shows or hides toolbars Function Toolbars po Allows you to expand or compact function toolbars Status Bar Alt O C7 Shows or hides the Status bar Folder Browser Alt 1 a Opens or closes the Folder Browser window Information Window Opens or closes the Information window Alt 2 Variable Declaration Opens or closes the Variable Declaration Table Window Table Alt 3 Hardware Configuration Opens the Hardware Configuration window Alt F4 MAIN block Alt F5 Opens the _MAIN block Local Logic Variable Opens or closes the Local Logic Variable Table if the folder Table Alt 6 contains a Local Logic program Allows you to sort specific columns of the VDT in ascending or descending order Monitor Allows you to disable or enable real time logic execution on the PLC in all windows or in the active window Display Format Allows you to change the display format of monitored logic Format View Table Allows you to determine how data is displayed in the selected Variable View Table row Reference View Table row or entire Reference View Table Zoom In Ctrl Makes view larger Zoom Out Ctrl Makes view smaller GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A 3 Insert Menu Allows you to insert an object into the Folder Browser Block ss Block
193. ible to place the PLC in RUN mode with an active fault condition that is configured to be fatal To avoid this condition always clear the fault tables before storing the program and configuration to the PLC Opening Other Fault Tables GFK 1670D It is possible to view fault tables in other PLCs if the port device assignment has been established using the Communications Setup option found in the Comm menu Perform these steps to open other fault tables l From the File menu select New I O Table or New PLC Table The Connect dialog box will appear Select the Device Name that matches the PLC containing the fault table you want to open Select the Port that matches the communication link to the PLC Click the OK button Chapter 11 Working with Fault Tables 11 5 Changing Fonts You can change the font for the Fault Tables by selecting the Edit menu and choosing Set Font The Font dialog box will appear allowing you to change the font type style and SIZe Note The font changes will affect only the fault tables not the other areas of VersaPro Printing Fault Tables To print the active Fault Table select the File menu and choose Print or click the Print button on the toolbar 11 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Appendix VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A This appendix shows the menu bars and toolbars used in VersaPro programming software and the Stand Alone Hardware Conf
194. iconverter with a modem connection it may be necessary to jumper RTS to CTS consult the user s manual for your modem Cable Diagrams Point To Point B 10 When connecting the Miniconverter to IBM PC and compatible computers with hardware handshaking the following cable connections should be used PIN PIN a44982 2 3 7 8 5 1 6 4 MINICONVERTER IBM PC AT RS 232 PORT 9 PIN 9 PIN CONNECTOR CONNECTOR VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Miniconverter Specifications Mechanical RS 422 RS 232 Electrical and General Voltage Supply Typical Current Operating Temperature Baud Rate Conformance Ground Isolation 15 pin D shell male for direct mounting to Series 90 or VersaMax serial port 9 pin D shell male for connection to RS 232 serial port of a Workmaster II computer or Personal Computer 5 VDC supplied by PLC power supply Version A IC690ACC9OIA 150 mA Version B IC690ACC901B 100 mA 0 to 70 C 32 to 158 F 38 4K Baud maximum EIA 422 Balanced Line or EI A 423 Unbalanced Line Not provided GFK 1670D Appendix B Serial Connections B 11 Appendix C GFK 1670D Use this procedure to transfer your license from one computer to another Usually a VersaPro License Transfer Procedure floppy disk is used to transfer a license but a network shared directory write able by both machines can also be used In this example a floppy disk is assum
195. ield in the variable must be selected The selected data is cut or copied to the clipboard It is now available for pasting to any other application that accepts tab delimited text 3 Select the variable s or cell s to which you wish to paste the information that you ve cut or copied Information on the clipboard that originated in another application may also be pasted to VersaPro 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu click the Paste button B or press Ctrl V Row validation is performed on each variable to check for global scope conflicts with existing variables before pasting to the VDT If a variable fails row validation an error message appears and then a dialog box appears allowing you to correct errors appears If the problem is corrected row validation continues for other variables If the information on the clipboard is valid for pasting in VersaPro and the number of variables or cells corresponds to the area that you ve highlighted the information is pasted 6 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D B Details on Cutting and Copying e If every cell in a variable is selected and a cut is performed the variable is deleted from the folder e Vertical gaps between non contiguous variables are deleted when the variables are copied to the clipboard e Rows on the clipboard are separated by a CR LF Columns are separated by tabs These separations become obvious when pasting to an external
196. ies H Ed General Diagnostics Agg Remove Prope nies Dialing Preferences Dialing fram Default Location Use Dialing Properties to modify how your calls are dialed Dialing Properties Close Bancel f a Standard Modem cannot be added which may be the case for PCMCIA modems because of the tight integration with Windows follow steps 3 through 6 paying close attention to the notes that start with A modem that is not a Standard Modem will have a name that corresponds to the make and model of the actual modem being used Because the Windows communications strategy uses TAPI Telephone Application Program Interface a non generic driver will re configure the modem and reset user edited parameters in the modem upon dialing 3 With the standard modem selected click the Properties button Under the maximum speed for that modem choose the desired baud rate if it 1s not already selected 4 On the Connection tab Data bits should be 8 Parity should be None and Stop bits should be 1 5 Click the Advanced button and deselect the Use Flow Control checkbox f the modem is not a Standard Modem the Use Error Control checkbox may be selected This option should not be selected The Extra Settings textbox must be populated with the AT commands from the modem configuration settings documentation provided 6 Click OK and Close to exit the Modems Properties dialog box VersaPro Pr
197. iguration tool VersaPro Menus File Menu The file menu includes standard file and print operations for VersaPro components Option Button Action Submenu for creating a new folder object Save Ctrl S Saves the selected item Save All Shift Ctrl A im Saves the entire folder Close Ctrl F4 Closes the selected window New Folder Ctrl N i Creates a new folder or imports an existing folder Open Folder Ctrl O Opens an existing folder Close Folder aa Closes the open folder Prints the selected item Print Report Allows you to define which components and blocks should be included in a report then print the report Page Setup Allows you to specify page parameters lt MRU list gt ma Lets you open a recently used folder from a list of Most Recently Used MRU folders Exit Alt F4 Closes VersaPro software GFK 1670D A 1 File Menu New Submenu Subroutine Ctrl B Creates a Ladder Diagram or Instruction List subroutine Motion Creates a Local Logic program Motion program or CAM program View Table ee Creates a Reference View Table or a Variable View Table Edit Menu A 2 Reverses the previous action The previous action for example Drop or Delete appears instead of lt action gt Reverses the previous undo action The previous action for example Drop or Delete appears instead of lt action gt Removes the selected item and places it on the Clipboard Copi
198. iguration with the programmed configuration It will generate a Loss of rack alarm for missing receivers and an Addition of or extra rack alarm for extra receivers 7 24 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Switching Between VersaMax Rack Systems You can switch from one VersaMax rack system type to another This allows single rack systems created in VersaPro versions earlier than 1 10 to be upgraded to Local Single Rack and Multiple Remote Rack systems Switching rack system types has the following effects When you switch configurations a message is displayed which gives you the option of carrying out the parameter changes of the existing CPU modules to the new rack configuration To change rack system type choose Expansion Rack System from the CSM or the Edit menu Select an expansion rack type from the submenu Changing VersaMax Rack Systems Local Single Rack A new expansion rack appears None Multiple Remote Seven new expansion racks appear in the rack Rack system Multiple Remote Rack or None A message is displayed to warn about the loss Local Single Rack of rack s and modules in it and the fact that these operations cannot be undone If you click OK the standard rack will be displayed Multiple Remote Rack Local Single Rack A message is displayed to warn about the loss of rack s and modules in it and the fact that these operations cannot be undone If you click OK arack s
199. ilable for VersaMax systems Clear Rack Deletes all modules excluding the Power Supply and CPU for the selected Rack Configure CPU Parameters Displays the Module Parameter Dialog which allows editing of the configuration parameters for the Rack System CPU Replace CPU Displays the Module Selection Dialog which allows for the selection of a replacement Rack System CPU Name Resolution and Routing Displays the 90 30 Ethernet Adapter Name Resolution Dialog which allows for the specification of Ethernet Adapter Naming and Routing Tables This menu item is not available for VersaMax systems Ethernet Global Data Displays the 90 30 Ethernet Global Data Dialog which allows for the definition of Ethernet Exchange Ids This menu item is not available for VersaMax systems Add Base Carrier Displays the VersaMax Add Base Carrier Dialog and extends the selected rack with the selected Base Carrier This menu item is not available for 90 30 systems Delete Base Carrier Deletes the currently selected Base Carrier in a VersaMax rack This menu item is not available for 90 30 systems Insert Base Carrier Displays the VersaMax Insert Base Carrier Dialog and inserts the selected Base Carrier in front of the selected slot of the VersaMax rack This menu item is not available for 90 30 systems Replace Base Carrier Displays the VersaMax Replace Base Carrier Dialog and replaces the selected Base Carrier in the selected slot of the VersaMax rack This
200. in the Rack 2 Click the right mouse button and choose Clear Rack 3 A confirmation dialog box will appear To confirm the clear rack operation click the Yes button GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 11 Genius Bus Configuration Series 90 70 PLCs The Genius Bus view is used to configure the bus attached to a 90 70 Genius Bus Controller GBC This window contains serial bus addresses SBAs for 32 devices 0 31 The controlling GBC occupies the SBA corresponding to its Serial Bus Address 31 by default which is configured in the module parameters for the GBC In a Redundant Controller system the redundant GBC also occupies a SBA on the bus SAHWC assigns a name to the bus in the format FileName Bus_rack_slot If you move the GBC to a different rack slot location the bus name will be updated The Genius Bus view appears automatically when you add a GBC to the 90 70 rack system configuration You can also access this window by selecting a GBC and choosing Expand Bus from the context sensitive menu CSM fm 90700ct5 Bus_0_2 Pile ES Genius Bus Genius Bus Bus ze Bus Operations To set Redundancy to Yes for all devices on the bus Go to the Edit menu select the Bus Operations submenu and choose Set All Devices Redundant On all blocks that have a Redundancy parameter it will be set to Yes To set Redundancy to No for all devices on the bus Go to the Edit menu select the Bus Operations su
201. ing Cenci Help To enter Description Stored Value Scope Override Retentive and External for the variable select the Auxiliary tab These values can also be edited in the VDT GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 19 Chapter GFK 1670D Configuring PLC Hardware Stand Alone Hardware Configuration HWC contains the configuration information for your Series 90 70 Series 90 30 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro and Series 90 Micro PLCs as well as Ethernet Global Data EGD configuration It also provides tools to allow you to monitor power consumption and I O mapping for modules added to your system The default rack and CPU configuration that appears when you enter HWC is set by selecting Options from the Tools menu in VersaPro The configuration information must match the physical hardware of your system Typical steps in configuring your PLC hardware include e Configuring the rack type and power supply e Selecting and configuring a CPU for a PLC rack system or an NIU for a VersaMax Remote I O rack system e Configuring modules and customizing parameters for your application e Configuring EGD exchanges and Name Resolution if applicable e Saving the HWC so that it can be stored to the PLC from VersaPro Detailed information about configuring parameters for a specific module is available through the online help To access this information open the Parameter Editor window for the module d
202. ing the block s variables to the Variable Declaration Table If the block being inserted contains variables that conflict with existing variables in the folder the message Variable name scope already exists in the variable declaration table appears Clicking OK opens the Variable Resolution dialog box which allows you to resolve variable conflicts See Variable Resolution in chapter 6 If you are inserting a C block select the exe file you created using the C Toolkit Opening a Block 3 6 Once a block is part of the Folder Browser you can open and edit the block at any time Multiple blocks may be open at the same time To open a block in the Folder Browser select the block you want to open and double click the block name Note C blocks cannot be opened in VersaPro VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Maximum Block Size The following table lists maximum sizes for subroutine blocks VersaMax 16KB VersaMax Nano Micro 18KB Series 90 30 16 KB for LD blocks 80 KB for C blocks Series 90 70 32 KB for LD blocks 64 KB for C blocks Inserting and Editing Objects GFK 1670D VersaPro allows you to associate objects with your folder For example you can insert an Excel spreadsheet Word document or Access database file into your folder Once the object is associated with your folder you can edit the object by double clicking in the Folder Browser To insert a
203. ion Prod ID 10 0 0 1 Exch ID 2 Exch Definition Prod ID 10 0 0 1 Exch ID 1 In this example Device A produces two exchanges and consumes none Device B produces one exchange and consumes one and Device C produces no exchanges but consumes three The exchange produced by Device A and consumed by both Device B and Device C is an example of Group Usage whereby multiple devices consume data produced by one producing device VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Ethernet Global Data Example 2 This example shows the details of a simple exchange of data from producing device A to consuming device B Device A Producer ID 10 0 0 1 ee a S PLC A sends the information contained in the memory locations defined for the following variables P_Var1 6 bytes P_Var2 4 bytes PLC B receives the sent information and stores it in the memory location defined for the following variable C_Var1 10 bytes Device B Assigned Producer ID 10 0 0 2 PLC A sends the information contained in the following reference memory locations Each byte in the exchange contains eight discretes aligned at byte boundaries IOOOO1 to 100016 QO00001 to Q00008 PLC B receives the information and stores it in three consecutive bytes in G memory as follows GOO0001 to G00024 GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 39 Details of Producing PLC A The details of the exchange that PLC A produces are
204. ion two instances of VersaPro can be connected to the PLC Each connection would use a unique communication port on your PC For example one connection would use COM1 while the other would use COM2 With two sessions connected you can have two additional sessions offline or not connected e Ifyou are connecting to the PLC via Ethernet you can have four instances of VersaPro VersaPro supports only one Ethernet adapter in your PC but allows up to four connections via this adapter Using VersaPro Overview VersaPro provides a single programming interface to configure your PLC hardware create and edit PLC logic and monitor the execution of the PLC program Component Description Folder Browser Displays a tree like structure that provides an overview of the current folder WT Hardware VersaPro s default hardware platform is the VersaMax PLC You can Configuration change the hardware platform to create programs and hardware configuration for Series 90 70 Series 90 30 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro and Series 90 Micro PLCs di Logic Editors There are two editors for creating PLC logic the Instruction List editor and Motion Editors the Relay Ladder Diagram RLD editor You can convert programs and blocks from IL to RLD A Motion editor and a Local Logic editor are provided for creating Local Logic and Motion programs for the Motion Mate DSM314 motion control module A Cam editor is provided for creating cam profiles
205. ion and local logic blocks found in that folder You can select one or more blocks to restore If the PLC and VersaPro folder motion blocks are the same during the load from PLC process motion backups will not be made and the list will be empty However if this is not a first time load and there were motion block differences between the PLC and the VersaPro folder those backups will be displayed in the list In other words when you restore a backed up motion block the backup remains in the folder and will be displayed in the list unless you physically remove it 3 To restore a single motion block highlight the block and click the Add button 4 To restore multiple blocks either select the Add All button or press the Ctrl or Shift key and use the mouse to select blocks or sections of the list Then click the Add button 5 If you want to remove a block from the Blocks to Restore List select the block and click the Remove Button 6 To remove all blocks from the list click the Remove All button 7 To remove a set of selected blocks press Ctrl or Shift key and click to select the blocks and then click the Remove button GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 1 9 12 When you are satisfied with the list click the OK button The blocks in the folder that have been loaded from the PLC will be replaced with the backups from the VersaPro folder you selected To cancel the replace operation click the Cancel button Note
206. ions on the EZ Program Store device follow these steps 1 Connect to the PLC 2 Select the PLC menu and choose Flash EEPROM The Read Write Verify Flash Memory dialog box will appear Read Write Verify Flash Memory ES select items for operation Read l Hardware Configuration Write i Logic Verity Stored Overridden Values Memory type amp Flash EEPROM e e Mez Ergan store 3 Select the folder components you want for the flash operation You can select individual components by clicking on them 4 Under Memory Type select EZ Program Store 5 Select the flash operation by clicking the appropriate button e Toread from the EZ Program Store device to the CPU click the Read button e To write from the CPU to the EZ Program Store device click the Write button e To verify that the program data in the EZ Program Store device matches that in the CPU click the Verify button 6 When the operation is complete a message box will indicated success or error GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 23 Viewing PLC Status Information Once VersaPro is connected with the PLC you can view PLC status information through the status line at the bottom of the window and through the Status Window dialog box When you connect to a PLC the status line at the bottom of the folder window provides a summary display of status information Aun Enabled Connected 1 8 mec Equal 7 a Tells w
207. is 200 millivolt Care must be taken that common mode voltage specifications are met Common mode conditions that exceed those specified will result in errors in transmission and or damage to components B 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Cable and Connector Specifications The cable assembly presents one of the most common causes of communication failure For best performance construct the cable assemblies according to the recommended connector parts and specifications PLC Serial RS 422 port with metric hardware Connector 15 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DAISS solder pot Hood AMP 207470 1 connector shell Hardware Kit AMP 207871 1 Kit includes 2 metric screws and 2 screw clips IBM AT XT Serial RS 232 port with standard RS 232 connector Mating Connector 9 pin female D Subminiature Type Cannon DE9S solder pot with Connectors DE110963 31 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector RS 232 RS 485 Converter one 15 pin male and one 25 pin male connector 15 pin male connector requires metric hardware same connector hood and hardware as for Series 90 PLC listed above 25 pin male D Subminiature Type Cannon DA25S solder pot with DB110963 3 hood or equivalent standard RS 232 connector Computer grade 24 AWG 22 mm2 minimum with overall shield Catalog Numbers Belden 9505 Belden 9306 Belden 9832 Cable These cables provide acceptable operation for
208. it This section describes the Miniconverter Kit for use with Series 90 and VersaMax PLCs Description of Miniconverter The Miniconverter Kit IC690ACC901 consists of an RS 422 SNP to RS 232 Miniconverter a 6 foot 2 meter serial extension cable and a 9 pin to 25 pin Converter Plug assembly The 15 pin SNP port connector on the Miniconverter plugs directly into the serial port connector on the Series 90 30 and VersaMax PLCs The 9 pin RS 232 port connector on the Miniconverter connects to an RS 232 compatible device a44985 RS 422 RS 232 PORT PORT When used with an IBM PC AT or compatible computer one end of the extension cable plugs into the Miniconverter s 9 pin serial port connector the other end plugs into the 9 pin serial port of the computer The Converter plug supplied with kit is required to convert the 9 pin serial port connector on the Miniconverter to the 25 pin serial port connector on the IBM PC XT or PS 2 Personal Computer B 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Pin Assignments RS 232 Port The pinout of the Miniconverter is shown in the following two tables The first table shows the pinout for the RS 232 port The direction of signal flow is with respect to the Miniconverter Pin Signal Name Direction 2 SD Send Data Output 3 RD Receive Data Input 5 GND Ground n a 7 CTS Clear To Send Input 8 RTS Request To Send Output The pinouts were cho
209. its when they are loaded by the Logic Engine Unsigned variables are not sign extended Thus the Logic Engine handles all data conversion and limit checking automatically Note The immediate command AQ variables Torque Limit Velocity Loop Gain Follower Ratio Position Increment and Position Loop Time Constant may have an allowed range that is smaller than the Local Logic variable size The module reports a warning error code and rejects any invalid values if the program attempts to write a value outside the valid range of an immediate command Refer to the Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1742 for a description of the allowed range for each immediate command Group Each set of axis specific variables contains Control variables Status variables and Faceplate I O The Global tab contains only Global variables 9 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Description This column contains a description of the variable To view the complete description hover the cursor over the cell refer to the Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1742 R If this column is checked the variable can be read by a local logic program W If this column is checked the variable can be written to by a local logic program Note Variables can be Read Only Write Only or Read Write The Parser reports an error if you attempt to write to a Read Only varia
210. izard window which can be used to configure redundant 90 70 CPU and Genius systems The Wizard automatically creates the 90 70 rack and Genius bus configuration according to the selections you provide Window Menu Arranges windows in an overlapped fashion Arranges windows in non overlapped tiles Arrange Icons Arranges icons of closed windows Window 1 2 Goes to specified window Help Menu Contents Displays a structured Help Table of Contents from which you can get help Help Index Offers you an index to topics on which you can get help Module Help Provides parameter specific help for the selected Parameter Editor window How to Use Help Enumerates the different types of Help available in HWC and describes how each can be applied to assist you in learning and using the program About HWC Displays the version number of this application GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A 17 HWC Toolbar Opens Parameter Editor window for CPU a Opens Parameter Editor window for selected module Opens the Module Catalog from which you can select a module to be configured Opens the Module Catalog from which you can select a CPU to be configured Opens the Module Catalog from which you can select a module to be configured in place of the selected module eB Displays or hides the Reference View which lists references configured for the rack system Displays or hides the Log View which displays a hi
211. k select the Parameters tab Up to seven parameter pairs can be assigned to an external C block for 90 70 7 Click OK A new block is created If the Folder Browser is open and a block is selected the block is added to the Folder Browser above the currently selected item If the Folder Browser is closed or the Folder node Hardware Configuration or VDT in the browser is selected the block is added at the end of the browser GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 3 90 30 Timed Interrupt Block Name Requirements For the 90 30 PLC Timed Interrupt blocks are defined and named in the form If p is 1 the Time Base is 001 seconds and 1111 can range from 0001 to 0010 with block names 1T0001 to 1T0010 If p is 2 the Time Base is 01 seconds and 1111 must be 0001 with block name 2T0001 Examples Block Name Initial Delay Time Interval The Timed Interrupt block 1T0005 would be defined as follows Time Base 001 s Initial Delay 0 Time Interval 5 5 msec The Timed Interrupt block 2T0001 would be defined as follows Time Base 01 s Initial Delay 0 Time Interval 1 10 msec The Initial Delay for a 90 30 PLC Timed Interrupt block is always 0 If a 90 30 PLC is declared in Hardware Configuration and the block is designated as a Timed Interrupt block but the name does not match the naming specification an error 1s reported when you click OK to close the Create New Block dialog box Name Field Restricti
212. l logic syntax is easy to learn and provides a rich feature set that allows you to accomplish the programming task For details about Local Logic programming refer to Motion Mate DSM314 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1742 9 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Using the Local Logic Variable Table Local Logic accesses the DSM314 motion controller variables and parameter registers using pre defined variable names The Local Logic Variable Table LLVT displays these variables which are organized into six tabs Axis 1 4 Global CTL Bits and Parameter Registers Each set of Axis variables contains Control variables Status variables and Faceplate 1 0 Tips for working in the LLVT e To change the width of a column select and drag the divider on the right side of the column head e To copy the contents of a selected area in the LLVT to the Clipboard press Ctrl C or choose Copy from the CSM To select a single cell simply click in it To select a block of adjacent cells click and drag or click hold the Shift key and click again You can select rows or columns by clicking or clicking and dragging the border at the top or left side of the table Select the entire table by clicking the upper left corner e To sort the LLVT click in the column you want to sort by then choose Sort from the CSM or from the View menu Choose Ascending or Descending from the submenu that appears
213. l using the keyboard or mouse Keyboard Select Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the parameter where you want to assign a variable Press Enter The variable combo box will appear Mouse Select Double click the parameter cell The variable combo box will appear 2 Type a variable name reference address and scope optional into the edit box using the following guidelines Fields must be separated by commas Variable Name Scope Reference Address Enter reference type and address in following fonmat 100F or F100 Global G Loca L Valid Characters Include 4 2 z 0 9 wa funderscore 2 gt The following example shows creating a variable LINE2 COUNT for parameter IN2 of the ADDINT Function Variable Combo Box ADD INT Creating Variable LINE2 COUNT Reference Address R00300 Local Scope BATCH1 I 1 OF siiis LINES COUNT L200k IN VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 3 To accept the variable press the Enter key or use the mouse to click off the active cell Note To edit information for an existing variable select the variable in the LD Editor click the right mouse button and choose Edit Variable The variable will be highlighted in the Variable Declaration Table allowing you to edit information about the variable The exceptions in changing LD logic involve replacing existing variables When a variable is replaced i
214. layout for the PLC port a43621 PLC 90000000 0 oO e oO oO 0 oO The table below shows the pin numbering and signal assignment Signal Name 1 Shield 2 No Connection 3 No Connection 4 ATCH Hand Held Programmer attach signal 5 5V 5V Power for HHP and RS 232 485 Converter 6 RTS A Request To Send 7 Signal Ground Signal Ground OV 8 CTS B Clear To Send 9 RT Terminating Resistor for RD 10 RD A Receive Data 11 RD B Receive Data 12 SD A Send Data 13 SD B Send Data 14 RTS B Request To Send 15 CTS A Clear To Send Signals available at the Connector but are not included in the RS 422 specification SD Send Data and RD Receive Data are the same as TXD and RXD used in the Series Six PLC A and B are the same as and A and B denote outputs and A and B denote inputs B 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D IBM AT XT Serial Port The IBM AT IBM XT or compatible computer s RS 232 serial port is a 9 pin D type male connector as shown in the figure below a44523 IBM AT XT PIN The following table shows the serial port pin out Ta ee 2 RD Receive Data a a 3 RD Receive Data 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Signal Ground po we Ew NC RTS Reas wend ED Sgn Gend CTS CleartoSend to Send DCD Data Data Carrier Detect Detect DTR Data Terminal Ready NC Not Connected Request
215. lbar button The block s are checked All warnings and errors are written to the Information Window If the compile is successful 0 errors VersaPro writes the block size to the Information Window even if the block is larger than the maximum allowed Note You can navigate to the location of the syntax error by double clicking on the error in the Information Window VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Converting Block Logic VersaPro allows you to convert IL logic to LD and LD logic to IL Most but not every formation in one language can be translated to the other Certain exceptional instructions may lead to errors upon attempted conversion Therefore if you intend your logic to be translatable avoiding a particular set of instructions will minimize the errors you encounter See Rules for Successful Conversion on page 3 22 Note Blocks are converted on an instruction by instruction basis so logic is not optimized for the LD language Series 90 70 and Series 90 Micro PLCs do not support IL programming Assigning Conversion Variables When converting IL logic to LD conversion variables must first be assigned as follows 1 Open a folder 2 From the Edit menu choose Properties Variable Table or select the Variable Declarations node and choose Properties from the CSM The Properties dialog box appears 3 4 Select the Conversion Variables LD tab 5 Select the Conversion V
216. lly Adding an Element by Direct Entry to a VVT 1 From the Folder Browser open a VVT 2 Select the Name field on a blank line in the VVT 3 Select a variable using the Name field s drop down list or type in a valid variable name 4 Press Enter or select another field The entered variable and corresponding columns address and scope are displayed in the VVT Valid VVT Variable Entries Valid variable entries may consist of any of the following e name e address If only an address is typed into the Name field that address will appear in both the Name and Address fields e name address The Scope will default to global e name g The scope will be assigned as Global e address g e name address g e name local scope Scope is the block to which the variable should be locally assigned For example to assign a variable with the name A locally to a block named B type A local B in the Name field e address local scope e name address local scope The length of a variable in a View Table reflects the length that was entered into the Variable Declaration Table Changes to length may only be made through the VDT Information may not be entered directly into the Address or Scope fields 8 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Adding an Address to a Reference View Table 1 From the Folder Browser open an RVT 2 Ona blank line select the Reference Address col
217. locks VersaPro allows you to change the order in which blocks are displayed and printed Blocks are printed in the order they appear in the Folder Browser To rearrange the order simply select the component you want to move and then drag and drop it to the new location You can also move blocks using standard Windows cut copy and paste commands Viewing and Modifying Block Properties Block properties are initialized when the block is created However you can change the description of a block at any time Depending on the type of block you can also edit other properties LD IL C Basic Modify Block Name and Description Motion Local Properties Logic Cam LD IL C Schedule Define I O Interrupt and Timed Interrupt behavior LD IL C Lock and unlock view and edit access to block Motion Local DSM Select DSM module The only DSM available at this Logic time is selected by default Specify the C executable file associated with the block Specify input and output parameters for the C block Perform the following steps to edit the properties of a block 1 From the Folder Browser select the block whose properties you wish to view 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Properties Block or click the right mouse button on the block and choose Properties The Properties dialog box will appear 3 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Properties Ed Basic Properties Schedule Lo
218. logic to the appropriate area To drop the selection release the mouse button and or the Ctrl key To copy as tab delimited text for pasting into another application 1 Open the IL block you want to edit Select row s or cell s you want to copy 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Copy as Text 3 The selected information is copied as tab delimited text and becomes available for pasting into any application that accepts tab delimited text 5 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Instruction List Operation The IL programming language is an Accumulator based language The instructions executed by the IL program modify or use an Accumulator that is located in PLC memory The Accumulator also has a Type associated with it that has been set by an operator or Function call The operators that can be used in an IL program are listed in the following table Since IL is an accumulator based programming language the operators work directly on the Accumulator Comparison operators have a Boolean 1 or 0 result depending upon the result of the operation Operands for IL instructions can be in the form of Variables References or Constants Operators and Functions are unconditionally executed when encountered in the IL program That is an instruction is executed regardless of the result of a previous instruction The LD Load operators are used to set the contents of the accumulator to the value of the var
219. meter For example if your SNP_T3 parameter is 20250 set your SNP_T3P parameter to 20500 or more SNP_T3PP At least 250 greater than the SNP_T3P parameter For example if your SNP_T3P parameter is 20500 set your SNP_T3PP parameter to 20750 or more 6 To save your changes click OK on the Edit Port dialog box and on the main CCU screen 10 6 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Multidrop Connections If a Multidrop configuration has never been defined for a device or your PLC hardware configuration has not been set to support these connections follow the instructions below The physical connection from PC to PLC will depend on your application see Appendix B Communications Cabling for details about cables and connectors Configuring Your Device and PLC CPU If your application requires that you change the default serial port settings from the SNP default 19200 ODD 8 Data Bits 1 Stop Bit or set an SNP ID do the following 1 Open the HWC file for your application and double click the PLC CPU 2 Inthe Parameter Editor select the Settings tab 3 Make the appropriate changes to the serial port settings and or SNP ID Close the Parameter Editor and save the hardware configuration Iii Example 0 1 IC693CPU364 settings Scan Memory Power Consumption Ethernet RS 232 Port Station Manager FiS 232 Port EN 4 gt Parameters Values 4 Checksum Words g Data Rate bp
220. modify 3 18 using search and replace Select the Edit menu and choose Find Replace search Ey Find Next The Find Replace dialog box will Address appear Search For Replace 2 Complete the dialog box as follows Search By Use this field to define what you are searching for Address Select address to search for a reference address Call Sub Select Call Sub to search for a call to a subroutine block R eplace With M0013 Replace All M0115 T Outputs Only Cancel Implicit Addresses Help He EEE Name Select Name to search for a variable name VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Jump n Label n Select this choice to search for a Jump or Label in your program MCR N END_MCR N Select this choice to search for MCR ENDMCR functions in your program Search For Use this field to set the address block name variable name or label to be used in the search replace Replace With Enter the string address label or variable name that will be used in the replace operation Outputs Only To limit the scope of the search to references used as outputs only coils check this box Implicit Addresses To locate addresses that are included but not named in a function block for example in an array check this box 3 Select the action you want to perform Find Next Click this button to find the next instance of the search string in your program
221. n VersaPro create a new folder based on the Logicmaster folder 6 In some cases the folder will still not convert completely because the declaration file symbol table hardware configuration or C Blocks have not been updated to the LM90 70 release 6 format The Ctrl T operation in Logicmaster only updates the logic files e Ifthe declaration file is not imported as indicated by the following message in the VersaPro information window Unable to import declarations file you should open the folder with Logicmaster add a rung with just a coil and enter Q which will force the value to be the next highest used and then delete the rung This will force the declaration file to be recompiled in the LM9070 release 6 or greater format e Ifthe symbol table is not imported into VersaPro as indicated by a message Failure to read block_name ste you should open the folder with Logicmaster 90 70 release 6 or greater add a variable to the variable declaration area of the block that will not import and then delete the variable to force Logicmaster to recompile the symbol table in the new format e If you receive an error message Invalid iocfg cfg file Please select valid iocfg cfg you should open the folder in the Logicmaster 90 70 Configuration package and edit one of the configuration items by changing it to another value and then back to the original value e If your folder has C blocks and the folder was created before LM9070 release 6 you
222. n a number of circumstances for instance when you close a folder or close the application the VDT is saved automatically GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 13 a Compacting the VDT When you edit the VDT by cutting copying pasting or deleting the VDT retains information about your edits This edit history can cause the VDT to grow substantially in size If a large amount of editing has taken place in a particular VDT it is sometimes useful to remove the VDT s edit history and thereby lessen its size The Compact option on the Folder menu allows you to do so To compact the VDT 1 Open a folder 2 Open the Variable Declaration Table 3 Make the Variable Declaration Table active 4 Choose Compact from the Folder menu The VDT is compacted Viewing the Highest References Used To display a list of the highest references used for all memory types select Highest References Used from the VDT context sensitive menu Finding Unused Variables Unused variables are variables which have been created but are not used in any program logic From the Folder menu select Find Unused Variables The unused variables will be listed in the Information window by Name Scope and Address Creating a Cross Reference Listing of Variables From the Tools menu or the Folder browser CSM menu select View Online Cross References The Information window will display a list of all variables used in the selected
223. n a shee 6 9 Details on Pasting cccsvesste iis ook teeta a NE EE EE N AAEE 6 9 rodra andsdrop Cut nine VDT emee a 6 10 Todras and drop copy m the VDT retence ear or aa a 6 10 Details on Dragging and Dropping in the VDT ssssnsssenssenssorsssesssessssesssesssers 6 11 To drag and drop from the VDT to the LD or IL Editor ee eeeeeeeeeees 6 11 Details on Dropping a Variable into an Editof s nnnseensseesssenssersseerssersserssseees 6 11 Variable Declaration Table Utilities seeossecssseecssecsseessseesssee 6 12 Srne VariaDleS seas iar ore a a a EE 6 12 Deleting Variables and the Contents of a VDT ccc cceeccceeeceeeeeeeneseeeeneeees 6 12 Saving Edits m the VD ierse n a A A es MGs hae 6 13 Compacting the VDE ereraa a R a a 6 14 Tocompact the VDI eae E a na aad a a TE 6 14 Viewing the Highest References Used ccecccceecccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 14 Finding Upused V atia OLE S eyascsrne e OA 6 14 Creating a Cross Reference Listing of Variables cceeeee 6 14 To View Online use tables 3c 6ci0n sone sw anoe E A E a 6 14 Importing and Exporting Variables ssccccssscosssccssssccessees 6 15 EOP AV aria DNC a sant ving sivieyaest viavsbeieenuiciv in eseat 6 15 Details on Importing an SNF File 20 2 0 ecccceeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeees 6 15 TOExporta Vata DiC rcs tssietscinstataceatiaidareleldesuideteleidaa tide weleadees 6 16 Details on Exporting an SNF File 2 0 0 cecccceecceeeseeeeeeenee
224. n object into a folder 1 Open the folder into which you wish to insert an object Go to the Folder Browser 2 Select the item below which you want to insert an object 3 Select the Insert menu and choose Object or click the right mouse button and select Insert Object The Insert Object dialog box will appear 4 Select the name and the location of the file you want to insert VersaPro component files files with an extension of blk fld hwc wvr wrt or vdt may not be inserted 5 Click Open The object is inserted To launch an inserted object 1 Open the folder containing the object that you want to launch Go to the Folder Browser 2 To open the object double click on the inserted object or select the object using the up or down arrow keys and then press Enter or select the object click the right mouse button and choose Open If an application is associated with the folder type the application will start up opening the selected object If no application is associated with the object the standard Open With Windows prompt will appear Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 7 Working with Blocks and Objects in the Folder Browser VersaPro provides a flexible browser interface to manage the blocks view tables variable declaration tables and objects associated with the folder This section describes how to manage the files and information associated with the components in the Folder Browser Arranging B
225. n the VDT e If collisions occur when creating variables in the VDT an error message appears describing the problem e Click OK A dialog appears allowing you to correct the problem e Correct the problem Row validation continues for other variables If you cancel the entire paste is cancelled saving View Tables It is important to save changes to both RVT and VVTs when editing This section describes how to save View Tables Online values are not saved with view tables Online values are maintained in the PLC and are displayed in the view tables To save changes when editing a view table Select the File menu and choose Save or click the Save toolbar button GFK 1670D Chapter 8 Using Reference and Variable View Tables 8 13 Online Viewing To view online values for view tables the folder must be open and you must be connected with the PLC In addition the View Table window must be monitoring PLC data To set the View Table to monitoring click the Monitor All or Monitor Active toolbar buttons This section provides details about window behavior when working online and describes how to change values online Details about Online Viewing If the value is too large to display in the current Value column cell width displays until the column width is altered Override status is displayed as an underlined value as in both editors Overriding and toggling variables is done through the right mouse menu Array Var
226. n the Variable Declaration Table 2 Select a column in the VDT other than the Stored Value column by clicking on its quick select button VersaPro does not allow sorting on the Stored Value column 3 Choose Sort from the View menu then choose Ascending or Descending from the submenu that appears or choose Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the Context Sensitive Menu Deleting Variables and the Contents of a VDT Variables can be deleted from the Variable Declaration Table without removing ladder elements from ladder logic or instructions from instruction list logic Elements from which variables have been removed become unnamed VersaPro also allows you to delete the contents of a Variable Declaration Table clearing the VDT Performing such a deletion removes all the VDT s variables from the Global Local and All tabs and from program logic The logic itself is not affected The VDT remains in the folder and is always displayed in the Folder Browser it can only be cleared not deleted To delete a variable in the VDT 1 Open the Variable Declaration Table 2 Select the variable or variables that you want to delete 3 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or press the Delete key The variable or variables are deleted from the VDT 4 The variables are deleted from program logic 6 12 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D e In Ladder Diagram blocks the names of deleted variables are remov
227. na EE EENG 7 32 Ethernet Global Data Configuration ccccssccssssccsssscesssees 7 33 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Adapter Name CPU364 7 34 Setting Aliases for Remote Ethernet Interfaces CPU364 and IVI 7A ascents cette aaa she ew a E ees 7 34 Name Resolution and Routing Table Configuration CPU364 and NIN TE eck aan E A corer seta E E AEA 7 34 D ftinm EGD EXcnane eS asic ccceiecitesiectieeioieetintiaeddetiecdeeaie 7 36 PLC Timing Considerations a sacsrerscsiearsecadviaanchdebsiveadheaechiadeaviadeieneds 7 37 Ethernet Global Data Example 1 ec ceecccseccceeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaes 7 38 Ethernet Global Data Example 2 cccccceccccseseceeeeeeeseeeeneeeees 7 39 Restoring EGD and Name Resolution ccccceccceseseceseeeeeeeeees 7 41 Advanced User Parameters for EGD CPUE0S 0000 ee 7 41 Configuring VersaMax Nano and Micro PLGC6 ssseesees 7 43 Rack Mod le J CLAUIOIS oats esa sacl E ER 7 43 Counter Pulse Width Modulation and Pulse Train Output 7 44 Contents xi Contents Chapter 8 PWM Frequency and uty Cy Cle sccisesksotixtnkcls a a 7 44 Configuring Averaging Filter for Analog Input Potentiometers 7 44 Configuring Series 90 Micro PLCS ccssccccsssscccssssccessssoeees 7 45 Rack MOGUIE Operations snenia an a IA 7 45 Counter Pulse Width Modulation and Pulse Train Output 7 46 PWM Frequency and DOU Cy Cle negriera 7 46 Co
228. nfiguration To store motion programming first put the PLC in STOP mode Then choose Store from the PLC menu In the dialog box select Store Hardware Configuration and Motion to PLC Store Folder to PLC x OK Cancel M Store logicta PLC Store stored overridden values to PLC Help ied 9 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Restoring Motion and Local Logic Blocks Backup copies of motion and local logic blocks in the open VersaPro folder are automatically made when you load the PLC configuration including all motion and local logic programs from a PLC containing blocks of the same name VersaPro will only create these backups 1f there is a difference between the motion local logic block stored in the folder and the block stored on the PLC A user prompt will ask if you wish to create the backups The backup is one deep Multiple backups of a single block are not automatically made This restore mechanism provides a method of recovering modified motion program blocks from the PLC without the loss of comments stored in the VersaPro folder Comments are not stored to the PLC and are available only if the VersaPro folder containing the comments is available To restore a Motion mbk or Local Logic lbk block 1 Choose Restore Motion Blocks from the Folder menu 2 The Restore Blocks dialog box will be displayed The Available Blocks list contains a list of all backups of the mot
229. nfiguring Averaging Filter for Analog Input Potentiometers 7 46 Hardware Configuration Reference View sccccsscccssscssssees 7 47 Hardware Configuration Log View scccsscocsssccsssccssssccsssees 7 48 Hardware Configuration Power Consumption View 7 49 Power Consumption Limit Calculations ccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 7 49 Components of the Power Consumption View ccccseeeeeeeeees 7 51 Converting Rack Systems cccccssscccssssccsssscccsssscccssssccessccoeees 7 52 Printing Hardware Configuration sccccsssccsssccssssccssscccsssees 7 52 Using Reference and Variable View Tables ccccsssscsssssoes 8 1 Variable View Tables Overview ccssccccsssssccccssssccccssssccoes 8 2 Reference View Tables Overview cscccccssssscccsssssccsceesees 8 3 Creating New Reference and Variable View Tables 8 4 Customizing View Table Display ccsssccsssssccsssscccesssccseeees 8 5 Changing Reference View Table Display Format c eee 8 6 Customizing Variable View Table Display Format 004 8 7 Adding Elements to a View Tablle ccccsssccssssccssssccssscccsscoees 8 8 Adding an Element by Direct Entry to a VVT ou ec ceeecceneeeee ees 8 8 Vald Vy T Variable Enies cerron a AES 8 8 Adding an Address to a Reference View Table cccccceseeeeeees 8 9 Nand RVD Ethie oeron a
230. nformation about that variable is still retained in the Variable Declaration Table If you replace the existing variable with a new variable the new variable information is added to the Variable Declaration Table In some cases a constant can be replaced by a variable You can replace a variable or constant either with an existing variable or with a new variable To replace a variable with an existing variable in LD 1 Select the parameter cell using the keyboard or mouse e Keyboard Select Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the parameter where you want to assign a variable Press Enter The variable combo box will appear The current variable or constant will display in the edit field e Mouse Select Double click the parameter cell The variable combo box will appear The current variable or constant will display in the edit field 2 Type the name of the replacement variable or enter a constant Press Enter to accept Assigning Constants to Function Block Parameters Constants can be assigned to functions and parameters in ladder logic Constant values are displayed during monitoring in the default type format of the element in which each is used To assign a constant using keyboard entry 1 Use the arrow keys to position the cursor on the parameter where you want to assign a constant 2 Type the constant value Press the Enter key If the constant is not valid for the function block an error message will appe
231. ng variables change the parameters as required in your application e VersaPro will display message boxes if the variable definition is incomplete or for modified variables does not pass validation GFK 1670D Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 5 a Navigating in the VDT VersaPro allows you to navigate using either the mouse or the keyboard You can also navigate to a particular variable using the Go to Variable dialog box or the Edit Variable menu item Navigating Using the Mouse or Keyboard To navigate using the mouse Move the mouse arrow to the cell that you want to edit then click the primary mouse button As with keyboard navigation if you re editing a cell moving the selection implies accepting the data in the cell from which you are moving To navigate using the keyboard Reference the following table to navigate through the VDT using the keyboard Key Action Arrow Keys If the current cell has not been selected for editing if the cell but not the text is highlighted the arrow keys move the selection one cell in the direction of the arrow key If the current cell has been selected for editing the Left and Right arrow keys move the cursor to the left or right in the cell until the beginning or end of the text is reached Moving from one row to another by using up down or right left arrow keys always triggers row validation If the current cell has not been selected for editing if
232. ngle exchange cannot exceed 1400 bytes The total size is defined to be the sum of the data type lengths of all of the variables within the list The exchange size 1s displayed in the Ethernet Global Data dialog box To define an EGD exchange 1 From Hardware Configuration go to the Edit menu choose Rack Operations and select Ethernet Global Data or click the right mouse button and choose Ethernet Global Data from the pop up menu 2 In the Ethernet Global Data dialog box click the Produced Exchanges tab to define exchanges produced by your PLC or click the Consumed Exchanges tab to define exchanges consumed by your PLC VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D PLC Timing Considerations Since the PLC scan time and the exchange time settings Exchange Period for produced exchanges and Scan Period for consumed exchanges are asynchronous the following should be noted e The production of a data sample onto the network occurs at the specified Exchange Period and is independent of the time the data sample is actually updated from the CPU The CPU will attempt to update the data sample at the Exchange Period interval but cannot guarantee delivery at that specific time due to being delayed by the PLC sweep time For example if the CPU is executing logic when the exchange period expires the update will be delayed until the logic execution is complete Therefore the data sample produced on the network may
233. ning By default if you attempt to store from VersaPro to a PLC that contains a program created by another programmer Logicmaster 90 or Control a warning message is displayed You may choose to continue the store process or cancel it To disable or enable this feature L Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears Select the Communications tab To disable the warning remove the check from the box labeled Warn and allow to quit if store will overwrite a program stored by a programmer other than VersaPro To enable the warning place a check in the box Click OK VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Setting Ladder Options VersaPro allows you to specify the types of information displayed about LD Editor symbols and the width of LD Editor grid cells You can also zoom in or out in order to proportionally enlarge or decrease the display size information in cells To specify the types of information displayed about LD Editor symbols 1 Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the LD Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears 2 Select the Ladder tab General Display Ladder Communications MPYLL Editors Show hide field 5 Mode Mial M Refterence address C Brief Description Full Grid Cell v victh Mlin O M Coil Jump Justification Column 0 i Show 8x10 Rung Indicator cence Helo
234. nts Chapter 10 Renaming a Cam BIOCK secccescsccsacnovedousares seutecwekoismmchsnieewsteeaimenteteds 9 16 Using Cam Profiles in a Motion Program ccccceeeeeecneeeeeeeeeees 9 16 Communicating with the PLC csscsssssccssscccsssccsssscsssssoees 10 1 RT a a E T N E 10 2 OD ra CN E E E E TET 10 2 PO e E 10 2 Modem Turnaround Time cccccccesccseceecceeceeceseceeceecescesecaseees 10 3 Connec 10 ANE EC oea E 10 4 Direct Serial Port Connection 0 cece cece cece seceeeceeceeceeecesceeeceeeees 10 4 Serial Parameter Settings cccccceccccseseccseecceesecceeseeseeeeeeeeeeaeeeesensesaeseessnsessenes 10 5 IVOIEIG EON Conie HONS e RS 10 7 Configuring Your Device and PLC CPU sssnessessseessserssersserssersseersserssersseres 10 7 oTe n A e eq E E A EE meter T E tert 10 9 TCP IP Ethernet Connection s eseceecesessescssesresrrscsrrsererrerserseseesees 10 9 Configuring Your PC and PLC Hardware ccccceccccsececceeeeceseeeeeseeseseeneeens 10 9 Connec me TO Cn a coisa sctersta sa catoe tac oats saps ian a a 10 11 Modem Connections accacnsicnosssraameaercssieasansceeicrantesaseeaeatesreaniseeads 10 12 Modem Configuration and Cabling cccccccccsecccesesecceeeceseceaseeeensesseneesaaees 10 12 Soraa a A E OE E E NEE E E E EE E 10 13 Configure a Modem in Windows ccsescccseseeceescccensecsenccceesecsensecsuseesenseeaanes 10 13 Set up Modem Communications using the CCU
235. o any application which recognizes the bitmap image 4 16 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D To paste in the LD Editor 1 Open the LD block you want to edit Select rung s or cell s you want to copy 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Paste Las l click the Paste toolbar button or press Ctrl V 3 The elements are pasted into the ladder The paste operation overwrites any elements previously existing in the destination cells Existing comments Labels or MCRSs are shifted down in order to accommodate a pasted element s To delete one or more elements 1 In the LD Editor select a row or a group of rows a cell or rectangular group of cells or one or more rungs 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Delete click the Delete button LE on the toolbar or press the Delete key The selection is deleted Variables defined in the deleted logic remain in the VDT Note Cut Copy Paste Delete actions may be undone by selecting the Edit menu and choosing Undo or by clicking the Undo toolbar button Inserting an empty row in the LD Editor Perform these steps to insert an empty row into the LD Editor 1 Open the block you want to edit 2 Select any instruction in the row above which you wish to insert an empty row 3 Select the Insert menu and choose Row press the Insert key or click the right mouse button and select Insert Row An empty row is inserted above the selected row All su
236. o tries to connect on startup is determined by the Connect Timeout parameter in the CCU To set Connect Timeout go to the Tools menu and select Communications Setup In the CCU choose the Global Parameters tab If you want VersaPro to connect to a particular device immediately upon startup and to open the folder associated with that PLC 1 Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM 2 The Options dialog box appears 3 Select the Communications tab 1 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D General Display Ladder Communications MP LL Editors Wait Time 120 Seconds Enable Autoconnect Device Location FPLC Firmware Revision Checking No firmware revision checking during store C Warm during store if firmware revision is incompatible Prevent store to incompatible firmware revision Warn and allow to quitif store will overwrite a program stored by a programmer other than VersarPro cence Helo 4 Click the Enable Autoconnect checkbox 5 Inthe Device field select the Device to which you wish to connect automatically upon startup PLC or click the Browse for Folder button J and select the location from the Browse for Folder dialog box This specifies the location where VersaPro will start to search for the VersaPro folder that is stored in the PLC VersaPro uses the PLC Folder Nickname PLC program name to determine what
237. o you will see fld in the Files of type list 4 Select the drive and folder to open 5 Click the Open button 6 The folder opens Its components are displayed according to the properties retained upon the last Save VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Using the Folder Browser After creating a new VersaPro folder or opening an existing folder the Folder Browser appears along with the default windows logic editor information window etc Menu Bar and Toolbars 7 YersaPro Example _MAIN bIk Provide quick access to File Edit view Insert Folder PLC Tools frequently used functions alal Slal 2 e S e gt TSpR Bon Mile ES Tk atl Ololm ol ele Tal zr WAR alala e m ajaa fa Function Gro ACOS 1 Fy Sane i 100081 24Q0001S A Hardware Configuration H Variable Declarations nut gt 6 008 sl I00019 a Frg_Li gt Simple Browser View Torque Displays all components contained 2 Trigger in the folder To view details for a component double click the item Logic Editor Window Displays program or block logic i ain syntax check summary otal errors U otal warnings U Information Window IFA General Find amp Cross e Displays warnings and error messages Displays results of Load Store Verify e Mame m Displays results of Find operations lesioned e Displays result
238. ogram construction System Variables S SA SB SC cannot be edited They are present in the variable list whenever a new folder is created Modifications that you make to variables in the Variable Declaration Table are reflected at all reference points including program logic Note Declaration of variables with overlaps for example a variable at R8 with length 3 and a variable at R10 of length 2 have an overlap at RI1O will result in stored value conflicts when you attempt to Store the stored values to the PLC In order to resolve these conflicts you must use the VDT to relocate variables so that they do not overlap To create a new variable or modify an existing variable in the VDT 1 From the Folder Browser double click on the Variable Declarations icon The cursor will become active in the Variable Declaration Table 2 Perform the following steps to create or edit e To create a new variable click the right mouse button and choose Insert Row A new row will appear in the VDT e To edit an existing variable locate the variable and double click on the fields you want to edit Global Local All System Temporary Name Type Len Address Description Stored Value scope Ret Ove ROO Mord eROO100 Local MAIN xRo0100 ord 39 j a 3 For new variables complete the Name Type and Address fields Verify Scope and Length You may also enter a Description and Stored Value if desired To modify existi
239. ogramming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Set up Modem Communications using the CCU Note Changes made to Modem Properties through CCU are not saved in the operating system modem settings To retain these changes you must edit the Modem Properties in the Windows Control Panel select Control Panel then Settings Note Do not use the same name for a modem port and device in the CCU That will cause problems when saving the information to the initialization file 1 Under the Tools menu select Communications Setup Select the Modems tab 2 Click New to add anew modem to the list Add New Modem po United States of America 1 GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 15 10 Give the modem a name and enter the area code and phone number Click OK to accept the modem Do not click the Configure Line button because any changes made will not be saved After a modem has been created a Send Break checkbox will appear in the Selected Modem Parameter Settings on the Modems tab If this box 1s checked the programmer will send the break signal to the remote PLC If the remote CPU has break free SNP this box does not need to be checked In the CCU click the Ports tab Click New to add a new port to the list e Type the name of the port e For Type select SNP_SERIAL e For Physical Port select the COM port used by the modem on your computer e Set the Port Settings to be equal with those
240. olbar to show or hide windows to open the _MAIN block or to magnify or reduce a window s contents Buttons not related to the current task are not available Monitors all windows Monitors the active window Turns monitoring off Zooms In on magnifies the active window s contents LE Zooms Out from reduces the active window s contents Folder Toolbar A 10 EIEI Use the Folder toolbar to check syntax Checks all blocks for syntactic correctness Checks selected block s for syntactic correctness VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D PLC Toolbar 2 8 atala ea oslo el Use the PLC toolbar to connect to a PLC and to perform operations involving a Soe PLC like a and loading or running and stopping logic Button Function o ae Verifies equality between the current folder and elements present on the PLC ie a gl ame ba eee Seeman Function Toolbar Use the Function toolbars to select function block types while programming in the LD editor Function groups are listed in alphabetic order The Function toolbars can be configured to display in expanded or compact mode To change the mode select the View menu choose Function Toolbars then select Expanded or Compact All Function Grau acos EH GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A I HWC Menus File Menu Option Action Import Stand Alone Impor
241. older Browser is automatically saved the size of the last active block is saved as the retentive block state and the individual size and position of all dockable windows and all columns are saved as retentive states Saving a Folder VersaPro allows you to save an open folder and folder contents to its current location This operation saves the entire folder not individual parts To save a folder select the File menu and choose Save All You can also click the Save folder button on the toolbar The open folder is saved The File Save menu item saves only the selected component Deleting a Folder To delete a VersaPro folder locate the folder on your hard drive and use Windows Explorer to delete the folder and its contents GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 17 Backing Up and Restoring VersaPro provides commands to back up a folder and to restore a folder from backup VersaPro creates backup files with a flb extension Backing Up a Folder Backing up ensures that data is not lost in any event It is recommended that you back up your folder occasionally to protect your program The folder is automatically backed up under the following conditions When you select File Save All When you respond Yes to the message The folder has been modified do you wish to save it first When you close a folder in which changes have been made to the folder directory These changes includes modifying folder objects s
242. ons e Only the characters A Z a z 0 9 and _ no consecutive _ s are permitted e The block name must start with a letter or underscore Series 90 30 Timed Interrupt Blocks follow different rules e A block cannot have the same name as another block that exists in the open folder An error appears if you enter a repeated name e The block name can be no longer than seven characters Description Field Restrictions e The description may be up to 64 characters e There is no restriction on the type of characters that can be used in a description 3 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Inserting a Block from Another Folder You can copy blocks between folders using the Insert Block option The name of the block you are inserting must be unique for the current folder If the block you want to insert has the same name as an existing block an error message will display When you add a block the block s variables are added to the Variable Declaration Table Perform the following steps to insert a block from another folder 1 Open the folder into which you wish to insert a block and go to the Folder Browser 2 Select the Insert menu and choose Block or click the right mouse button and select Insert Block The Insert Block dialog box will appear 3 In the Look In box navigate to the folder containing the block you want to insert Insern Block ed ES Look in E Examples
243. ons Change the settings in the Options dialog box To create anew empty folder from the VersaPro workbench 1 Click the New Folder button l choose New Folder from the File menu or press Ctrl N The New Folder Wizard will appear Hew Folder Wizard Folder Hame o fto co iii E i Location d E Frogram FilesGE Fanuc Autom Folder Description ee VersaPro folder for Wersal ax PLCs Default langauge LD 4 Hack Finish Cancel e In the Folder Name field type a name for the new folder A folder name is required See Rules for Folder Names and Nicknames on page 2 11 2 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D e If you want to save the new folder to a location different from the default click on the Browse button opposite the Location field e Enter a folder description in the Folder Description field You may enter up to 64 characters This field is optional 2 Click the Next button The next screen of the New Folder Wizard will appear N ew Folder Wizard T naude sina 3 The Empty Folder Default button is automatically selected Click Finish to create the new empty folder The Folder Browser appears displaying the new folder The _MAIN block will appear in the default language s editor GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 3 To create a new folder based on an existing VersaPro folder To create a new folder based on an existing VersaPro
244. onstant Accumulator Type set to Boolean GE Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator gt operand Constant Accumulator Type set to Boolean Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type set to Boolean NE Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator operand Constant Accumulator Type set to Boolean Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator lt operand Constant Accumulator Type set to Boolean LT Variable Ref Address or Accumulator Accumulator lt operand Constant Accumulator Type set to Boolean RET None Unconditional Return from Block RETC Return from Block if Boolean Accumulator has value of RETCN l Return from Block if Boolean Accumulator has value of 0 JMP Label Unconditional Jump to label JMPC Jump to label if Boolean Accumulator has value of 1 JMPCN Jump to label if Boolean Accumulator has value of 0 Subroutine Name Unconditional Call Block Call Block if Boolean Accumulator has value of 1 Call Block if Boolean Accumulator has value of 0 FUNC_NAME Variable Ref Address or Call built in PLC Function IN1 Constant dependent upon Accumulator value and Type are set to value and type of IN2 type of the function Output parameter Q1 if it exists Q2 gt parameters End of Boolean nested operation Accumulator value and Type are unchanged Boolean Constants The IL editor supports the following constants for use as
245. opens the Genius bus configuration tool Available when the GBC is selected Parameter Menu Data Entry Tool F2 Opens the Data Entry Tool for a selected editable parameter Reset Parameter Resets a single parameter to the Start of Edit Session value or to the Factory Original Value Reset Tab Resets all the parameters on the tab to the Start of Edit Session value or to the Factory Original value Cancel Edit Session Closes the active parameter edit window without saving changes Insert Inserts a row with default values above the selected row in certain tabs such as the Profibus Slave Information tab Delete Deletes the selected row in certain tabs such as the Profibus Slave Information tab and adds a default row to the end of the matrix GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A 115 View Menu Shows or hides the toolbar Shows or hides the status bar Log View Shows or hides the on line HWC Log View Shows or hides the on line Rack System Reference View Shows or hides the Power View window Parameter Edit Displays a submenu that allows you to change the Parameter Editor display format These options are available only when a Parameter Editor window for a module is open View Menu Parameter Edit Submenu Note These settings are not saved when you close the Parameter Editor To set the default display mode for the Parameter Editor go to the Tools menu choose Options and select the Parameter Edit tab
246. ory Search for Overrides When VersaPro is connected to a PLC searches the PLC logic for variable overrides Run F5 Runs the logic resident in the PLC Stop Ctrl F5 oO Stops the logic resident in the PLC Toggle F12 Allows you to toggle a reference Override F11 Allows you to override a reference Write F10 Allows you to write a value to the selected reference in the LD editor IL editor VVT or RVT Tuning Parameters Allows you to tune PID Instructions Status Info Shift F4 aa Allows you to view the status of the PLC GFK 1670D Appendix A VersaPro Menus and Toolbars A 5 Tools Menu Fault table Opens a fault table Communications Setup Allows you to define communications parameters Cam Editor Opens the Cam Editor which is used for creating Cam profiles and blocks for Motion programming Import Variables Allows you to import a variable Export Variables Allows you to export a variable View Online Cross Displays in the information window a list of all variables used in the selected Reference block by reference type View Online Use Tables Provides a table for each reference type used in the folder The table identifies reference addresses used as explicit implicit or both Results are displayed in the Reports tab of the Information Window Convert Block Converts selected block from LD to IL or IL to LD Non Nested to Nested Converts non nested MCR ENDMCR JUMP and LABEL instructions to the
247. ose e To close all blocks Select the Window menu and choose Close All If a block contains unsaved changes you will be prompted to save changes before closing the block e Click Yes to save the changes and close the block e Click No to close the block without saving e Click Cancel to leave the block open GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 13 Using Editing Operations on Folder Components VersaPro allows you to use any of the standard editing commands to cut copy and paste information VersaPro also supports undo and redo to manage changes made to folder components Using Undo and Redo VersaPro allows you to undo or redo certain actions like placing an element or deleting a row in Hardware Configuration in the Variable Declaration Table in the Variable View Table the Reference View Table and the IL Editor or LD Editor You can undo or redo actions using the standard menu commands keyboard shortcut keys or toolbar buttons The number of undo redo operations supported can be set to a value between 1 and 100 the default 1s 10 To adjust the number of undo redo operations supported by VersaPro select the Tools menu and choose Options If you are about to perform an action which due to its complexity or the amount of data involved cannot be undone a message box will appear warning you of this fact e To undo an action Click the Undo toolbar button E select the Edit menu and choose Undo or press Ctrl Z
248. ouble click the module then select Module Help from the Help menu Chapter Contents e Accessing Hardware Configuration e Configuring the Series 90 30 Rack or Series 90 70 Rack e Configuring the VersaMax Modular Rack e Configuring the VersaMax Remote I O Rack e Configuring VersaMax Nano and Micro PLCs e Configuring Series 90 Micro PLCs e Hardware Configuration Reference View e Hardware Configuration Log View e Converting Rack Systems e Printing Hardware Configuration 7 1 Accessing Hardware Configuration alll To access HWC from VersaPro double click the Hardware Configuration icon HHT in the folder browser The rack system for the configured CPU hardware will appear along with a graph showing power consumption statistics for the module a table showing references used in hardware configuration and a log that maintains a record of HWC events LHC Lab_ File Edit Parameter View Tools Window Help Dieja ar Helii fe i e ih Lab_ Main J Status Bar C200CPUON CPU Cfg User Memory Port 1 R5232 Port 2 R5485 Local Rack Not Saved Status Bar 2000 11 53 40 Add Base IC2Z00t Al xaa se x adh Jun 16 2000 11 53 45 Delete Base Cel Power EADE raliat verlag Star End Aci Mem Catalog Jun 16 2000 11 54 05 validating Harc Consumption End Aci Mem Catang View Reference View Jun 16 2000 11 56 00 Yalidating Hardy Jun 16 2000 11 56 24 Validating Harc Jun 16
249. oups VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D e To select a function group click the arrow on the Function Groups box and choose a function group To view all instructions select All Function Groups e To select an instruction click the arrow on the Functions box use the mouse to scan through the list or type the first few characters of the function name to locate in the list e To drop the function in the LD Editor window click the Function Drop Button position the cursor at the insert location in the LD Editor window and click to drop the function into your program Selecting Functions Using the Function Toolbar Expanded The Function Toolbar displayed in expanded form consists of a Group window and Instruction window To select Expanded form select the View Menu choose Function Toolbars gt Expanded The Group and Instruction windows will appear to the right of the LD Editor window S00_DINT S00 _ INT ADD_REAL DIW_DINT DIW_INT DIY REAL MOD_OI MOD_INT MUL_DINT MUL_INT MUL REAL Instruction Group SCALE_INT SCALE wORD SUB_DINT SUB INT CUB BEA All Function Groupe Bit Operations Booleans Controls Conversion Counters Numerical Relational Special Timer Function Group e To select a function group highlight the Function Group name in the Group window To view all instructions select All Function Groups e To selec
250. ower To increase or decrease the width slide the control between Min and Max Coil Jump Justification Column If this box is checked when you insert a coil or Jump instruction it is placed in the column specified right justified Valid values are integers 10 to 20 If this box is not checked coils are inserted in the next empty column Show 8 x 10 Rung Indicator When selected displays a border that marks eight rows and ten columns If folder s hardware configuration is 90 70 this option is always selected To change the color of the border select the Display tab choose LD from the Category list and Rung Indicator from the Color list Adjusting the Zoom Ratio You can increase or decrease the zoom ratio for the LD Editor by click the zoom in zoom out buttons To adjust the zoom ratio perform the following steps 1 Make an LD block active 2 Select the View menu and choose Zoom In or Zoom Out el You can also click the toolbar buttons 4 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Instructions and Instruction Parameters GFK 1670D This section describes how to enter and modify instructions and rungs in your ladder program Program logic consists of elements such as relays timers math functions and other functions placed together to form rungs of logic Variables and constants are assigned to function parameters as inputs and outputs to the function Variable Combo Box Type a new va
251. p operations are allowed e Moving blocks Reference View Tables and Variable View Tables within a folder browser changing order e Copying the _MAIN block to a different folder must rename the copy of _MAIN e Moving or copying blocks Reference View Tables and Variable View Tables between folders e Copying Hardware Configuration between folders Note To drag and drop a block it must be closed Drag and Drop works only within VersaPro applications Items are not placed on the clipboard and are not available to other Windows applications You cannot drag and drop the folder s root node Moving Folder Components Select highlight an item in the Folder Browser 2 Click and hold on the selected item The selected item is highlighted Drag the image of the selected item to the desired location in the same or another folder 4 Drop the image by releasing the mouse button The selected item and its contents are moved to the new location If you are dragging from one instance of VersaPro to another and the drop action that you are attempting involves a conflict in variables for instance if you are copying a Reference View Table that contains a variable already defined in the target folder s VDT the Variable Resolution dialog box appears so that you can change the conflicting variable to eliminate the conflict You can change the variable name type length or scope then click OK Click Cancel to cancel the drag and drop ope
252. pear when the floppy is successfully registered Information x rr The Transfer In License dialog will remain Do not click any buttons Proceed to the licensed machine to perform Step 2 Transfer Out GFK 1670D Appendix C VersaPro License Transfer Procedure C 3 Step 2 Transfer Out performed on the licensed machine Startup the Register Now program found under Start gt Programs gt GE Fanuc Software gt VersaPro gt RegisterNow Click the Next button on the Welcome dialog Welcome Welcome to the YersaPro Register Howl program This program will license YersaPro Standard Edition on Your computer Ik is strongly recommended that you exit all Windows programs before running this Setup program Click Cancel to quit Setup and then close any programs you have running Click Next to continue with the Setup program WARNING This program i protected by copyright law and International treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil and criminal penalties and Will be prosecuted to the masimum extent possible under law Cancel Click the Transfer License Out by Floppy button on the Transfer Out License dialog Transfer Qut License Miei 4 VersaPro license already exists on this system ou may authorize an unlicensed system by transferring out this system s license via floppy After transtering out the license this system will be
253. ph bar which represents the percentage of overall total power supply capacity that is currently used Please note that the system total 1s typically not a summation of all the voltages produced by the power supply but rather a lesser value The 90 30 power supplies are power limited and therefore display units are Watts Conversely the VersaMax power supplies are current limited and therefore display units are Amps GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 49 50 3 23 Woltag lt otaga Allow docking Hide 5 0 tara watag Seta dee Normal Range Waming Range 1 125 D 2TS Supplied Exceeded Range Capacity in amps VersaMax Power View 5YDC 2400 2400 Total ioo Relay Isolated Syskem Normal Range Waming Range Exceeded Range Used T5000 11 250 14 000 36 750 Capacity in watts supp 15 000 15 000 20 000 30 0000 Avl Ext 0 000 0 000 B 750 Series 90 30 Power View 7 50 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Popup Menu Components of the Power Consumption View Power Supply Whose Statistics are Displayed This is always the most immediate leftmost power supply to the selected module For a 90 30 System the Power Supply will always be in slot O since there is only a single Power Supply per rack For a VersaMax System which supports multiple Power Supplies the power supply can be in any slot and is the first one enco
254. plied in the Function Properties dialog box MOVE IHT DATA_INIT Functions The DATA_INIT data initialization functions supported by Series 90 70 PLCs require additional parameters such as Offset and Value which are not displayed on the function block The set of parameters required depends on the type of DATA_INIT function To set these parameters double click the function or select the function and press Enter The Function Properties dialog box will appear 4 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Completing Function Block Parameters After a function block coil or contact is added to the program you need to assign a variable or constant to each parameter This section describes how to complete function block parameters in one of the following ways e Assign an existing variable to a parameter e Creating a new variable for a parameter e Assigning a constant value to a parameter Assigning Variables to Function Block Parameters Variables can be assigned to elements and parameters in ladder logic Variables may be Local Scope local to the block or Global Scope Global to all blocks in the folder The default scope for variables is Global Scope You may assign an existing variable or create a new variable for the function block parameter This section describes how to assign variables to parameters using the mouse and the keyboard Note You can also drag and drop selected variables
255. ports functions 6 7 13 16 18 23 26 30 Role Switch same function and 29 Function 26 30 is Interrogate VO Data for SVCREQs 7 15 and 23 may not be same for 90 70 and 90 30 4 24 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Other Language Differences LD grid size confined to 8 rows 10 columns LD grid size has no row limit Limit of 20 columns 2a programs per folder C programs 90 70 can have 64 I O interrupt blocks 16 timed interrupt One timed interrupt block scheduling based on block s blocks name VersaMax can have up to 16 interrupt blocks any Interrupt blocks cannot call other blocks or be called combination of I O or timed Interrupt blocks can call other blocks and be called P WL Y GA GE memories N A Data flow between functions Cannot call more than 64 unique blocks from one block N A but since folder can only have 64 blocks essentially have the same limitation Block size up to 32K bytes Block size up to 16K bytes IL A LD topology restrictions No flow around functions Transitional coil must be only coil in rung No short circuits properly nested subexpressions No subpaths starting from a vertical if the rung contains a function unless the subpath leads directly to a coil No contacts following a function GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 25 Chapter 5 GFK 1670D Working in the Instruction List Editor The
256. pply PWROO1 and CPU CPU001 are in the default configuration The VersaMax rack system is built by selecting carriers into which I O communications and power supply modules are added The default VersaMax rack system has a main rack Multiple power supplies are supported on the main rack as required by the modules you need to add into your rack system Two types of VersaMax expansion networks are available Local Single Rack and Multiple Remote Rack The Multiple Remote Rack configuration allows up to seven expansion racks Multiple power supplies can be used in expansion racks In the physical hardware field wiring is connected to the module carriers instead of the modules HWC displays module wiring in the Module Parameters If you move a module between carriers be sure to update the wiring information accordingly UTR File Edit View Window Tools Help EA alk Main fcr a M2 Right Mouse Menu Choices Click the right mouse button to view list of available commands for the active carrier module j ie Replace aod fl Puy AO MOOS 41 Ehange hack velar Clear Rack Configure CPU Parameters i Replace CPU Hame Resolution and Routt Ethernet Haba Data Power Supply and CPU To edit CPU parameters click the right mouse button and select Configure CPU Parameters Add Carer Base Delete Carrer B ase Insert Carer B ase IL200CH
257. put To configure the High Speed Counter Pulse Width Modulation and or Pulse Train Output functions go to the Edit menu and select Module Operations Configure Parameters HSC PWM PTO You can also choose Configure Parameters HSC PWM PTO from the context sensitive menu A Parameter Editor window similar to the one shown below will appear Nano PLCs have only three counter tabs For details on configuring these functions choose Module Help from the Help menu HSC Ph FTO settings Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Parameters Yalues al COA Fn 4 Type A E Output Stop Mode Normal Reference Address woll4o4 Length ed Reference Address zoad0dgg HSCF PTO ve PWM Frequency and Duty Cycle The frequency and duty cycle of the PWM output are specified from the application program Pulse Train Output frequency is also controlled from the application program duty cycle is nominally 50 For details on configuring and using these features refer to Chapter 10 of the VersaMax Micro PLCs and Nano PLCs User s Manual GFK 1645 Configuring Averaging Filter for Analog Input Potentiometers VersaMax Micro PLCs have two potentiometers located below the Run Stop switch that can be used to manually set input values that are stored in AI16 and AI17 The number of samples to be averaged can be controlled by the application program By default 16 samples will be averaged For details on configuring and using this feature refer
258. r 5 17 Using ENO When a function or function block is executed it s ENO output is used to indicate the successful execution of the function block If an error occurs when the function is executed it will set or reset the ENO output The user can check the status of the ENO output by using the LD_ENO operator to load the ENO output value into the Accumulator The user can then examine this value for error handling Calculate the following expression ROOO0S ROO00 100 ROOOT met calcQE variable to 1 if calculation successful ADD DINTE IHI wF 00001 wF 000l IN2 100 J ol DINT wF 00003 wF 00003 LD ENO LD ENO used to get ENO output of ADD DINT JWIPC iH error MUL DINTE IHI wF 00003 wF 00003 IN2 oROOOTT oROOOTY al DINT wF 0000s wF 00003 LD ENO LD ENO used to get ENO output of MUL _ DINI JMIFCH error LD BOOL ALW OH ooU000 7 al BOOL cack wOQUOU0FF calcOk RET error LD BOOL ALW OFF ooU0008 al BOOL calcOkK MOQO00T calcOK 0 RET 5 18 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Defining Temporary Variables When programming in Instruction List the user must define the memory locations to be used by the IL Accumulator You must define eight consecutive discrete points in T M or PQ memory for use as the Boolean Accumulator You must also define two words of reference memory in AI AQ or R memory for use as the Word Integer Double Integer and Re
259. rack view click the right mouse button and choose Replace CPU 2 Click the catalog number and description of the CPU in your system then click the OK button Note To configure EGD exchanges for a 90 30 CPU364 or a 90 70 CMM742 see Ethernet Global Data Configuration on page 7 31 Configuring the CPU s Parameters GFK 1670D To configure the CPU s parameters 1 When you replace the CPU the Parameter Editor window appears If you are using the default CPU then double click the CPU slot 2 Within the Parameter Editor window click the tab pertaining to the parameters you want to view or modify where applicable 3 Click in the Values fields you want to edit See Editing Tips on page 7 4 4 When you have finished editing the CPU parameters click the window close button Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 9 Adding Configuring Rack Modules To add modules to the rack 1 2 Select the slot where the module is to be placed Double click on the empty slot or click the right mouse button and choose Add Module If you are replacing a previously configured module click the right mouse button and choose Replace Module Click the tab describing the I O module type you need Discrete Input Discrete Output Analog Input Analog Output Communications etc Click the catalog number and description of the module in your system then click the OK button Configuring the Module s Parameters To configu
260. rameter cell To edit parameter values e Type directly into the selected cell in a manner similar to typing into a spreadsheet cell or use the Data Entry Tool To open the Data Entry Tool right click in the parameter cell and choose Data Entry Tool from the context sensitive menu press the F2 key or double click e Ifthe valid values consists of a list of choices with unique initial letters select a value by simply typing its first letter in the cell You can save time when entering the same value for multiple parameters of the same type by Copying and Pasting or dragging and dropping one parameter value into other parameter value cells Copy Paste and drag drop can be used within the same module view or between module views 7 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D e To copy the data from the source cell to the drop cell do not press any key or press the Ctrl key while dragging Drag drop works with the keyboard as follows e To move the data from the source cell to the drop cell press the Shift key while dragging e To copy the data from the source cell to all cells between the source and drop cell including the drop cell press the Alt key while dragging This assumes that drag and drop is occurring on the same Edit window and the source and drop cells are in the same column This features allows you to quickly fill an entire range of cells with identical information Note Parameter
261. ration You can also have VersaPro resolve the conflict for you Copying Folder Components 1 Select highlight an item in the Folder Browser 2 Press and hold the Ctrl key 3 Click and hold on the selected item The selected item is highlighted 4 Drag the image of the selected item to the desired location in the same or another folder 5 Drop the image by releasing the mouse button and the Ctrl key Variable conflicts are handled the same as for components being moved GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 1 Deleting a Block If you decide that a block is no longer desirable within a folder you can delete it If the block is _MAIN it will not be removed from the folder but the logic will be cleared from _MAIN Deleting a block does not delete global variables from the Variable Declaration Table but it does delete the block s local variables To delete a block or View Table 1 Open the folder from which you wish to delete a block The folder must contain multiple blocks 2 Make sure that the block to be deleted is closed 3 Select any block except _MAIN in the Folder Browser tree lete from the Edit or the Context Sensitive menu click the Delete J or press the Delete key 5 A warning message appears asking if you are sure you want to perform this operation If you click OK the block is deleted from your folder and removed from the browser tree In the future any reference to the deleted block will pro
262. re the module s parameters 1 When you add or replace a module the Parameter Editor appears You can also access this dialog box by double clicking the module slot from the Rack window Within the Parameter Editor click the tab pertaining to the parameters you want to view or modify where applicable Click in the Values fields you want to edit See Editing Tips on page 7 4 When you have finished editing the module parameters click the window close button Configuring Expansion Racks Expansion racks are configured in the same manner as the main rack To add modules to an expansion rack click the Rack tab and add the module configuration which corresponds to the attached hardware 7 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Deleting Rack Modules Deleting a module removes it from the rack If you save the Hardware Configuration after deleting the module the configuration information about the deleted module will be lost Perform these steps to delete a module 1 Select the module you want to delete 2 Press the Delete key or click the right mouse button and choose Delete Module Clearing the Rack Clearing the rack removes all modules except the power supply and CPU If you save the Hardware Configuration after clearing the rack the configuration information about the deleted modules will be lost Perform these steps to clear the rack configuration 1 Click anywhere
263. readability and to separate certain items e The Motion Editor is not case sensitive e All motion programs and subroutines must be contained in a single motion program block Single axis and multi axis programs and subroutines A given single axis program must be able to run on any one axis specified in the Program definition statement Therefore motion language commands in single axis programs and subroutines will not specify an axis Rather the axis specified in the PROGRAM statement is used for all motion commands and subroutines called in the program Multi axis programs and subroutines can only call multi axis subroutines Likewise single axis programs and subroutines can only call single axis subroutines A multi axis motion program is valid only for axis 1 and axis 2 Axis 3 and 4 if enabled in configuration must be programmed as single axis programs only Note CAM instructions are not valid in Multi Axis programs Program and subroutine definition statements The Motion Editor requires Program and Subroutine statements that specify program subroutine number and axis configuration PROGRAM 1 MULTIAXIS or SUBROUTINE 2 MULTIAXIS These statements are placed on the first line of the program or subroutine Programs are terminated with an ENDPROG statement subroutines are terminated with an ENDSUB statement These statements serve as separators between programs and subroutines identify the program and subroutine number
264. riable peo AMENE HON name or click the arrow and select from list T00002 DELTE Function Address MOVE WORD Function Data Len m E00100 bine Function Block Parameters The example above highlights some of the features you will encounter when entering logic in the LD Editor Typed Instructions Functions In VersaPro many function blocks are typed This means that the type INT DINT REAL is associated with the function not the variable Function Data Length Many functions require a data length which is associated with the function not the variable Function Address Displays the reference address if required by the function block Function Block Parameters Input and Output parameters to function blocks must be completed Many function block parameters require variables or constant values like the Add function Other function blocks require Boolean parameters like contacts to enable or control how the function executes Variable Combo Box When assigning variables to function block parameters the variable combo box allows you to quickly select existing variables or create new variables Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 5 Entering Instructions There are several methods of entering instructions into the LD Editor to suit personal preferences and editing styles With VersaPro you can enter instructions using the Function Toolbar Ladder Toolbar or through direct keyboard entry wh
265. ride I O e Change variable values e Copy blocks and portions of logic from the folder e Create a new folder based on the locked folder The new folder will also be locked with the old folder s password e Store and Verify folders Unlocking a Folder If a folder is READ_ONLY you must unlock the folder to edit the folder If passwords were used when locking the folder they must be supplied to successfully unlock the folder Perform the following steps to unlock a folder 1 From the Folder menu select Unlock 2 If the folder has a password the Enter password dialog box appears 3 Type the password 4 The phrase READ ONLY in the folder s title bar disappears 5 The old password is cleared The folder can now be edited GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 21 Changing Folder Properties 2 22 Folder properties are set when a folder is created However you can change the folder description and nickname Perform the following steps to change folder properties 1 2 oy ey ee Open the folder whose description or nickname you wish to change From the Edit menu choose Properties Folder The Folder Properties dialog box will appear Change the description as desired A description may be up to 64 characters long Change the nickname as desired The nickname may be up to 7 characters Type header or footer text as desired Click OK The folder properties are saved and the Properties dialog box closes
266. rimary and 30 for the secondary l 2 10 11 From the Redundancy menu select Wizard In the Wizards window select Set up a Primary Rack System for CPU Redundancy Click Next Select a CPU CPU model CPU780 CGR772 or CGR935 can be used in this redundancy system Select the Redundancy Setup Single Bus with Preferred Master for CPU780 CGR772 or CGR935 Single Bus with Floating Master for CGR772 or CGR935 Dual Bus with Floating Master for CGR772 or CGR935 Select the Rack and Slot locations for the BTM and RCM Click Next Review the settings for Redundancy Scheme BTM location and RCM location If settings are correct click Finish If you need to make changes click Back When you click Finish the wizard will create a rack configuration with the selected CPU a BTM and an RCM Use the redundancy wizard to Add GBCs for Genius Redundancy Configure critical data and all redundant AQ and Q references in the Shared I O section of the CPU Settings tab Use the redundancy wizard to generate the secondary rack system Use of Rack 7 in CPU Redundancy Over Genius Schemes In these systems each PLC s CPU addresses the other PLC s Main Rack as though it was its own Rack 7 Therefore Rack 7 in each PLC system both Primary and Secondary will be reserved for this purpose and will not be available for use as a physical expansion rack GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 15 Storing the Configura
267. rnet Global Data or Name Resolution from a CPU364 When you initiate the Load configuration process the confirmation dialog box presents the option of backing up the EGD and Name Resolution configuration To restore these configuration components to your folder go to the HWC File menu and select Restore EGD and Name Resolution A browser window will open to enable you to navigate to the backup file GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 19 Clearing the PLC You can clear Hardware Configuration Logic stored overridden values and PLC and I O Fault Tables in the PLC To clear selected program items from the PLC follow these steps 1 Confirm that you are connected to the PLC The VersaPro status bar should indicate Connected If the status bar is not visible press Ctrl 0 2 Select the PLC menu and choose Clear The Clear PLC dialog box will appear Clear PLC Ea Components Hardware Configuration and Motion M Programn Logic EE OStored Values JOveridden Values OFLE Fault Table 0 Fault Table Select All Help 3 Select the items you want to clear in the PLC Components that have a check mark next to them will be cleared You can select and deselect individual components by clicking them 4 To clear the items click the OK button 5 When the clear operation is complete a message box will display Clear Completed Successfully 10 20 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide
268. rogramming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Edit Menu Cut Ctrl X Deletes the selected Module from the Rack System and moves it to the clipboard Paste Ctrl V Pastes the previously cut or copied Module from the clipboard into the selected slot of the Rack System Expansion Rack System Submenu of edit operations that are specific to VersaMax Rack Systems Expansion Receiver Submenu of edit operations that are specific to VersaMax Expansion Rack Systems Rack Operations Submenu of edit operations that are specific to the Rack System Module Operations Submenu of edit operations that are specific to the selected Module Edit menu Expansion Rack System Submenu The Expansion Rack System submenu of the Edit menu allows you to select the type of VersaMax system You can switch from one VersaMax system type to another however resulting changes to the configuration cannot be undone Option Action This is the default VersaMax system which is created when you select New from the File menu It includes only the Main VersaMax I O station no Expansion Local Single Rack Includes the Main VersaMax I O station and one Expansion I O Station Rack The Main VersaMax system does not contain a Transmitter The Expansion I O Station contains a Non Isolated Receiver and Power Supply Integrated Unit IC200ERMO002 Multiple Remote Rack Allows you to configure up to seven Expansion I O Stations seven Rack tabs are
269. roperties renaming 9 16 Cam Editor installing Cam profiles example 9 14 using in a Motion program Carriers VersaMax configuring deleting power supply booster 7 21 Catalog numbers converters IC655CCM590 B 10 IC690ACC900B 5 Index 1 Index IC690ACC901 B 8 CCU See Communications Configuration Utilit Changing rack type Checking Blocks 3 20 Clearing the rack Series 90 30 90 70 VersaMax 7 23 Clearing the Variable Declaration Table 6 13 Closing blocks 3 13 Comment column IL editor 5 2 Comments setting full or brief 1 6 Communications 110 4 connecting to a PLC modem connection multidrop connection RIO rack serial direct 10 4 TCP IP connection 10 9 Communications Configuration Utility password Compacting the VDT 6 14 Completing function block parameter s 4 11 Completing instruction parameters 5 5 Configuration NIU 7 28 Series 90 Micro 7 45 Series 90 30 or Series 90 70 7 8 VersaMax expansion networks 7 23 VersaMax modular rack VersaMax Nano Micro 7 43 VersaMax Remote I O rack Configuring VersaMax Modules 7 22 Connect Timeout modem communications Index 2 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 with Modem Turnaround Time 10 3 Connecting to a PLC 10 4 Constants assigning to function block par ameters 4 13 7 efor SLL rules 4 14 5 Context sensitive Menu
270. rrange windows as vertical non overlapping tiles Arrange icons at the bottom of the window Display the toolbar dialog Display the options dialog Display next tab window to the right Display next tab window to the left To perform folder operations CTRL N Create a new Folder Open an existing Folder Save an entire Folder Backup a Folder to flb Restore a Folder from backup flb Create a new Ladder Instruction List block Open _MAIN Block Bring _MAIN into focus Close all open Blocks Check selected Block s Check all Blocks in the Folder Open Hardware Configuration To perform general operations Esc CTRL BREAK DELETE Fl INSERT PGUP PGDN HOME END ALT BACKSPACE ALT ENTER CTRL A CTRL C CTRL INSERT CTRL V CTRL F3 CTRL G CTRL P CTRL S CTRL Y CTRL Z SHIFT DELETE SHIFT F1 SHIFT INSERT Abort the current operation Abort Delete the selection Display help for the item with focus Inserts a row Move up a page in the selected editor or table Move down a page in the selected editor or table Move to the top of the selected editor or table Move to the bottom of the selected editor or table Undo the last action Display properties dialog for selected block or folder Select the entire block or table Copy the selection to the Clipboard Copy the selection to the Clipboard Insert Clipboard contents Find replace the specified item Mov
271. ruction List Editor 5 7 Using Cut Copy Paste and Delete in the IL Editor In the IL Editor you can cut or copy row s or cell s from one portion of Instruction List logic to another portion or from one block to another without removing the variables included in those rungs or cells from the Variable Declaration Table You can also delete selected rungs or cells This section describes the different ways you can perform cut copy paste and drag and drop in the IL Editor window To cut or copy in the IL Editor 1 Open the IL block you want to edit Select row s or cell s you want to copy or cut 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit or right mouse menu click the Cut or the En Copy L button on the Standard toolbar or press Ctrl C to Copy or Ctrl X to Cut The selected information is cut or copied to the Clipboard Note You can only copy a part of a multi row instruction as text If you copy a single row of a multi row instruction the selection cannot be pasted back into VersaPro To cut or copy in the IL Editor using Drag and Drop 1 Open the IL block you want to edit Select row s or cell s you want to copy or cut 2 To Cut using drag and drop position the mouse arrow over the selected logic press down and hold down the primary mouse button To Copy using drag and drop position the mouse arrow over the selected logic press and hold the CTRL key then press and hold the primary mouse button 3 Move the
272. s 149200 Parity Odd stop Bits Modem Turnaround Time 01 sec C 0 Idle Time Sect 10 Timer Faults Disabled SNF ID Key Switch Run Stop Disabled Memory Protect Disabled Ignore Fatal Faults Disabled Series 90 30 CPU Model 364 o 4 Store the hardware configuration changes to the PLC 5 Repeat this process for every CPU in the multidrop system Once you have made necessary changes to the SNP default settings for the PLC CPU you need to change the settings for the PC port Follow these steps to modify port configuration for the PC 1 From the Tools menu choose Communications Setup If a password has been defined for the CCU the Password dialog box will appear Enter your password and click OK to continue The main screen of the CCU will appear GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 7 2 To add anew device click the New button The Add New Device dialog box will appear Add New Device Device Name Selected Device Parameter Settings K Device Model Cancel Default Port Associated Modem Associated Help ll Device Device Address si SNP ID eNULL gt IP Address l o l mm Enter 1 or more addresses 3 Set the Default Port to match the PC port you will be using COM1 through COM4 and enter the SNP ID for the PLC if one exists SNP ID is used only for multidrop configuration Click OK to add the device 4 Toc
273. s and indicate the type of program single axis or multi axis 9 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Le Block numbers and sync blocks Block numbers will be suffixed with a colon 10 for example Block numbers may appear alone on a line or preceding a motion command on the same line Sync blocks blocks containing a SYNC instruction are identified by a line with a block number followed by the SYNC command 20 SYNC for example The SYNC synchronize block command is used in multi axis programming to synchronize two axes at designated points For additional information refer to the Motion Mate DSM3 14 for Series 90 30 PLCs User s Manual GFK 1742 GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 5 z Using the Local Logic Editor To Open the Local Logic Editor e Click File on the menu bar select New Motion Local Logic Program e The Create New Local Logic Program dialog box will appear e Type the Local Logic program Name and Description select the module type then click the OK button The Name is required the description is optional A Local Logic Editor window for the new program block will open The program name appears as the title of the Local Logic Editor window and an icon for the new program appears in the Folder Browser window Local Logic Commands The local logic language uses free format text based constructs derived from the IEC 1131 structured text standard The loca
274. s are identified as FUNCTION_NAME Ifa function is selected parameters will appear between the brackets framing the function block 4 The new instruction is inserted into the IL program 5 4 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Completing Address and Length Information Certain instructions require you to supply a length for example a Move Instruction or an address for example a Timer Instruction for the instruction to operate Instructions which require this information will show a Length or Address field in the Instruction column as shown below Simply enter a length or address as appropriate Label ST_BQOL MOO11S The MOVE_ INT LABELS instruction LABEL requires a length MOVE _INTE to operate In correctly Length z The TMR_HUND TMP HUNC instruction requires an casi address to PY operate correctly Completing Instruction Parameters After an instruction is added to the program you need to assign a variable or constant to each instruction operand This section describes how to complete instruction operands in one of the following ways e Assign an existing variable to an operand e Creating a new variable for an operand e Assigning a constant value to an operand Assigning Variables to Instruction Operands Variables can be assigned to instruction operands Variables may be Local Scope local to the block or Global Scope Global to all blocks in the folder
275. s menu or from the LD or IL Editor context sensitive menu CSM Select the color to be used for each configurable area of the selected editor or table The list of configurable areas differs based on the window whose display you are configuring 1 7 7 Select the font name and font size to be used to display text in the selected editor or table Click OK Note You cannot change the font used for Column and Row headings The selected colors are applied to selected areas of the selected editor or table The selected font is applied to all text within the selected editor or table If the selected editor or table is visible it appears with its changed colors font and size Note Selected fonts are used when you print your program Setting Communications Options You can configure VersaPro to connect to a particular device immediately upon startup and to open the folder associated with that PLC Setting Wait Time To specify the delay in the amount of time before a server busy call will be recognized when you have closed and re opened the application 1 Choose Options from the Tools menu or from the Editor CSM The Options dialog box appears 2 Select the Communications tab 3 Enter a value in the Wait Time box Valid range is 8 to 2147483646 seconds 4 Click OK Configuring Autoconnect Note The Wait Time parameter on the Communications tab has no effect on the operation of Autoconnect The length of time that VersaPr
276. s of View Online Cross Reference xos f Bit LL Qos O a a Run Enabled annected s msec L Logic Equal y For Help pres Variable Declaration Table Status Bar Displays all variables defined in the folder Shows the PLC run stop state scan time and equality status GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 13 The Folder Browser displays a tree like structure showing all of the components associated with the folder The display includes a list of all blocks included in the folder including the _MAIN block as well as icons providing access to Hardware Configuration the Variable Declaration Table and View Tables The Folder Browser allows you to navigate through the current folder easily and to create arrange modify or delete blocks and block properties It also allows you to check the syntax of blocks within a folder and to Insert or add additional components to the folder To open an item in the browser window double click the item in the browser Information Window The Information Window s General tab displays error and warning messages for example the results of checking logic for syntax errors It also displays the details of searches replacements conversions from one language to another and the results of the Find Unused Variables command from the Folder menu select Find Unused Variables When a compile of an LD IL or Motion block is successful VersaPro writes the size of the blo
277. sen to allow direct connection using a straight through or 1 to 1 cable as provided with kit to the IBM PC AT Most IBM compatible computers equipped with an RS 232 port will provide a pinout compatible with the one shown above Pin Assignments RS 422 Port The following table shows the pinout for the Miniconverter s RS 422 serial port The direction of signal flow is also with respect to the Miniconverter Pin Sigal Nam SHLD Shield 5 VDC Power CTS A Clear To Send GND Ground RTS B Request To Send RT Receive Termination SD A Send Data SD B Send Data RD A Receive Data RD B Receive Data CTS B Clear To Send RTS A Request To Send GFK 1670D Appendix B Serial Connections B 9 System Configurations The Miniconverter can be used in a point to point configuration as described above or in a multidrop configuration with the host device configured as the master and one or more PLCs configured as slaves The multidrop configuration requires a straight through 1 to 1 cable from the Miniconverter s RS 422 port to the first slave PLC s SNP port Other slaves will require a daisy chain connection between slaves A maximum of eight devices can be connected in an RS 422 multidrop configuration All of the devices must have a common ground If ground isolation is required you can use the GE Fanuc Isolated Repeater Converter IC655CCM590 in place of the Miniconverter When using the Min
278. splay size This section describes the elements of the LD Editor window which can be customized Customizing Ladder Display Options When working in the LD Editor you may want to customize the fields which display online Perform the following steps to customize Ladder display options 1 Select the Tools menu and choose Options or click the right mouse button from the LD Editor and choose Options The Options dialog box will appear Select the Ladder tab varia M Reference address Description GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 3 2 Customize the display options to suit your needs Click the OK button to accept changes Show Hide Field Allows you to set the fields which will display in the LD Editor window Variable Name You can set the display mode to brief or full by selecting Variable Name and clicking the appropriate button in mode checking the appropriate button Brief mode displays one line and full mode displays up to two lines Reference Address To view the reference address associated with variables check this box Description To view the variable description check this box If you want to see the entire description you may also need to increase the Grid Cell Width You can also set the display mode to brief or full by checking the appropriate button Brief mode displays one line and full mode displays up to four lines Grid Cell Width Allows you to make the grid for cells wider or narr
279. sses or Call Statements in Blocks You can use the Find In Blocks feature to find all occurrences of variable names reference addresses instructions or call subroutines in IL and LD blocks Note To have the Find In Blocks feature search the entire program you must select the folder name in the folder browser This is the top level item in the browser Otherwise Find In Blocks will only search the selected block pip MAIN LD Follow the steps below to use Find In Blocks 1 Select the blocks that you want the Find In Blocks operation to search If you want to search all blocks make sure that no blocks are selected or all blocks are selected 2 From the Folder Browser or folder components select the Edit menu and choose Find In Blocks The Find In Blocks dialog box will appear Find in Blocks search by Find Call_sub Cancel Address Call sub ddd IL Instruction Help LD Instruction Name E e only ol plict Addresses 3 Complete the dialog box as follows Click the Find button to start the search Search By Specifies what you are searching for Address Select address to search for a reference address Call Sub Select Call Sub to search for a call to a subroutine block IL Instruction Searches for an Instruction List instruction GFK 1670D Chapter 3 Working With Blocks 3 17 LD Instruction Searches for a Ladder Diagram instruction Name Select Name to search for a variable
280. sssccceeees 3 16 Navisatino In Versa Pro sarsies a 3 16 Locating and going to a Rung Row or Variable cccccseccccseeeeeeseeeeseeneeeees 3 16 Locating Names Instructions Addresses or Call Statements in Blocks 3 17 Usmo Seach and Ropliai a e a a a 3 18 Performing Syntax Checks ssessseeseecssecseecssecssecssecssecsseosseesseoo 3 20 Converting Block LOSI ss scsiccticsscescacicdesecsnccecseseadectesscdvcaseaasaseseuses 3 21 Assigning Conversion Variables cccccccsescccssccceesecceesecaesceeeeseceeneeesnsessaeens 3 21 Converting BIOCK LOSIC sectcisatoceiesisicd wi s203 seen Sais ok 008 chun onde Ran Ge ra iaaah 3 22 Rules for Successful COnversion cccccsccceeccescccesceeecceeceaeseceeceseseeseceaeeeeaees 3 22 Converting Non Nested Instructions cccccseccceeeeeeeseceeeeeeneees 3 23 Working in the LD Editor sesecseccseccsecosecosecosecosscesscecsceosecoseeose 4 1 Overview of the LD Editor cccseessccseessccsecccccseeccecsecscecseeseecseesee 4 2 Customizing the LD Editor Window eessseecseeccsseeocsecosseecsseecssee 4 3 Customizing Ladder Display Options sseenssesssesssersserssersserssees 4 3 Adjusting the Zoom Ratio cccccsccccsesccceseceseeeeeeeeaeneeeeeseeseneeeees 4 4 Instructions and Instruction Parameters ccccscccssscsssccsssceees 4 5 Entering Instructions sseesscecssecssecsseosseocseosscosseecseecseecseecssecsseoos 4 6
281. story of significant events and status relative to your hardware configuration editing activities EA Displays or hides the Power View which shows the power consumed by the modules in the system A 18 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Appendix Serial Connections B GFK 1670D This appendix describes the serial port converter and cables used to connect to Series 90 and VersaMax PLCs for Series 90 Protocol SNP as well as the Miniconverter Kit This information is included for reference and for those users who have applications that require cable lengths different than the factory supplied cables B 1 Serial Port and Cables RS 422 Interface The Series 90 30 Series 90 Micro and VersaMax PLC products are compatible with EIA RS 422 specifications RS 422 drivers and receivers are utilized to accomplish communications between several system components using multiple driver receiver combinations on a single cable with five twisted pairs The total cable length cannot exceed 4000 feet A multi drop system of eight drivers and receivers can be configured The maximum common mode voltage between each additional drop is the RS 422 standard of 7 Volts to 7 Volts The driver output must be capable of 2 V minimum into 100 ohms The driver output impedance must be at least 120 K ohms in the high impedance state The receiver input resistance is 12 K ohms or greater Receiver sensitivity
282. t indicates the module type on which this program will be run Then click the OK button The Name is required The Description is optional A Motion Editor window for the new motion program block will open The motion program name appears as the title of the Motion Editor window and an icon for the new motion program appears in the Folder Browser window e The text based motion programs and subroutines are created in the Motion Editor window as shown in the following figure Ten motion programs and forty subroutines maximum separated by their identifying headers such as PROGRAM 1 MULTI AXIS can be programmed in the same editor window and are stored in the same motion program block fo Motion blk PROGRAM 1 MULTI AXxIS ACCEL AxIG1 500000 VELOC AxIS1 5000 1 CALL 2 CMOVE AxXI52 100000 ABS LINEAR DWELL AxIS2 6000 JUMP CTL31 1 CALL F255 GFK 1670D Chapter 9 Motion Programming 9 3 2 Creating Motion Program Logic The DSM314 supports 10 motion programs 40 subroutines and a maximum total of 1000 motion program statements Comments and white space are not considered motion program statements Basic Requirements Format e Motion programs and subroutines are written using ASCII text e Only one motion language statement is permitted per line and a motion language statement may not span more than one line Normal comments may span multiple lines e White space and blank lines may be used to improve
283. t an instruction use the slide control to scan the list of instructions locating the instruction you want to add to your program e To drop the function in the LD Editor window double click the instruction name notice that the cursor changes to a function block icon position the cursor at the insert location in the LD Editor window and click to drop the function into your program GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 7 Entering Instructions using the Ladder Toolbar You can use the Ladder Toolbar to select commonly used Boolean functions comments and call instructions to your LD program To select one of the toolbar instructions simply click the toolbar button move the cursor to the insertion point and click to place the instruction The comment toolbar button places a comment at the current cursor location g gt se see SF F g PF fF amp nu AN ge OOG OF a we oA w gt SS SSE ESS E SSE SS F Se Ss Note When a function or instruction is selected an instance of the function will be inserted into your LD Program each time you click the mouse button To de select the active function click the Normal Pointer toolbar button or press the Esc key on your keyboard 4 8 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Entering Instructions using Keyboard Entry It is possible to enter logic directly with the keyboard rather than using the mouse Perform these steps to enter
284. t is left justified by default The gt and format switches affect all the text that follows them until the end of the string or until the next gt or n Example The following string This is my customized footer nLeft justified gt Right justified results in This is my customized footer Left justified Right justified lt lt lt Standard VersaPro footer gt gt gt Notes e The number of characters in each entry is limited only by the buffer size of a standard Windows edit control e Header and footer strings are archived in the folder e Ifa header string is present it is printed on the line following the standard header datetime appname page e Ifa footer string is present it is printed on the line before the standard footer folder location block e The standard header and footer automatically increase their size to two lines if there is not enough space on a single line e VersaPro does not limit the number of lines present in the header footer strings e Ifthe header and footer will overlap each other or overflow the top or bottom of the page there is no room for the body of the page an error message will indicate this and the report will not be generated e No messages will be presented if the formatting sequences are used erroneously or if they would cause parts of a header footer line to overlap one another or to print off the left right side of the page 2 26 VersaPro Programming Soft
285. te the profile on a DSM314 this must be the Cam block specified in the hardware configuration e A Cam block that contains the profile must be defined in the VersaPro equipment folder This can be done in the Cam Editor or in VersaPro go to the File menu and choose New Motion Cam Program e The Cam block containing the profile must be specified in the DSM314 hardware configuration and stored to the PLC e The profile name referenced in the Motion program must match the name defined in the Cam Library For details on using Cam profiles in a Motion program refer to the user documentation for the DSM314 Three instructions are available for programming Cam motion CAM CAM LOAD and CAM PHASE Note CAM instructions are not valid in Multi Axis programs 9 16 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter Communicating with the PLC 10 Communicating with the PLC is necessary to perform such operations as storing and loading programs or viewing reference or PLC status information This chapter describes how to connect to the PLC and perform basic online operations Chapter Contents This chapter provides the following information e How to connect your computer to the PLC using the Communication Configuration Utility CCU e How to transfer Folders to and from the PLC e How to clear Folder data from the PLC and verify PC PLC Folder information e How to read write verify flash memory e Ho
286. ter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean Output Parameter Q Boolean GFK 1670D Function or Function Block ENO Requires Resulting Accumulator LD Boolean Value and Type Instruction RANGE_WORD Bit Functions Functions AND_WORD Output Parameter Q Word OR _WORD Output Parameter Q Word XOR_WORD Output Parameter Q Word NOT_WORD Output Parameter Q Word Bit Functions Functions SHL_WORD Output Parameter B2 Boolean SHR_WORD Output Parameter B2 Boolean ROL_WORD N A ROR_WORD N A BTST_WORD Output Parameter Q Boolean BSET_WORD N A BCLR_WORD N A BPOS_WORD Output Parameter POS Integer MSKCMP_WORD Output Parameter MC Boolean MSKCMP_DWORD Output Parameter MC Boolean Data Move Functions Functions MOVE_BOOL Yes N A MOVE_INT Yes N A MOVE_WORD MOVE_REAL Yes N A Yes N A Data Move Functions Functions BLKMOV_INT N A BLKMOV_WORD N A BLKMOV_REAL oe RD SHR BIT U SHFR_WORD p N A COMM_REQ Output Parameter FT Boolean Data Move Function Blocks Functions BIT_SEQ Table Functions Functions ARRAY_MOVE_INT N A ARRAY_MOVE_DINT N A ARRAY_MOVE_BIT Ja ARRAY_MOVE_BYTE ARRAY_MOVE_WORD N A SRCH_EQ_INT N A SRCH_EQ_DINT Output Parameter FD Boolean SRCH_EQ BYTE GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 15 Function or Function Block SRCH_EQ WORD SRCH_NE_INT SRCH_NE_DINT SRCH_NE_BYTE SRCH_NE_WORD SRCH_GT_INT SRCH_GT_DINT SRCH_GT_BYTE SRCH_GT_WORD SRC
287. ter introduces you to variables and describes how to create variables for use in your LD and IL programs Chapter Contents An overview of the Variable Declaration Table VDT An introduction to variables How to create and edit variables How to work with variables using standard cut copy and paste commands How to delete variables and compact and save the VDT How to import and export variables to and from SNF Files 6 1 a Overview of the Variable Declaration Table The Variable Declaration Table is organized into tabs Each tab displays variables as described below Global Tab Displays all Global variables Local Tab Displays variables local to the active block If no block is open the Local tab is blank All Tab Displays all variables Global and Local System Tab Displays System variables These variables are not editable but they can be used in logic Temporary Tab Displays variables created in the Variable Table Properties dialog box for temporary use in the IL Editor Temporary variables are not editable A sample Variable Declaration Table is shown below __Neme Type ten Aderess Description Sorea voue empe Ret ow Ea 2 a a A e vi T feom fee hi fa variable Scope sa Tv 1 eoms sr i f Global variables may be used on asa v pam far fi all blocs Goo v cooo fee fi fa Localvariables may beused foa y couse fer fi ont the boo Gor v toons fa Goo v Peco fn fc ob A a e e O
288. the IP address in your PLC Ethernet Interface Perform these steps to configure the PLC IP address 1 From HWC add an Ethernet module CMM742 CPU364 or CPUEOS to the rack system 2 Set the IP Address for the module Store the hardware configuration to the PLC CPU Once you have configured the IP address for the PLC CPU you need to change the settings for the PC port Follow these steps to modify port configuration for the PC 1 Connect your PLC and PC to the Ethernet network 2 From the Tools menu choose Communication Setup If a password has been defined for the CCU the Password dialog box will appear Enter your password and press OK to continue The main screen of the CCU will appear GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 9 3 To add anew device click the New button in the Devices tab The Add New Device dialog box will appear Add New Device po J J y i wo E E B 4 Set the Default Port to ENET and enter an IP Address that matches the IP Address configured for the Ethernet Interface in HWC Click OK to add the device 5 To customize global timeouts click the Ports tab select ENET and click Edit Click Advanced to access global timeout parameters mela See ee 10 10 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Connecting to the PLC GFK 1670D To connect to the PLC iB Select the PLC menu and choose Connect or click the Conne
289. thernet Global Data Empty row inserting ENO using in IL ditor 5 18 Error checking L paito 515 GFK 1670D Index Index Error color setting 7 7 Ethernet Global Data advanced user parameters confi guration 7 33 configuring interface adapter name name resolution and routing table 7 34 PLC timing considerations restoring setting aliases Ethernet interface adapter ea Expansion networks VersaMax configuring 7 23 Expansion Racks Series 90 30 90 70 configuring 7 10 Exporting Variables 6 17 EZ Program Store F Find in blocks 3 17 Find Replace 3 18 Finding program rung row or variable 3 16 Firmware revision checking 1 10 10 Folder components 1 3 changing order 3 9 Folders backing up and restoring creating 2 2 creating based on existing VersaPro folder 2 4 names Index 3 Index properties 2 22 Font changing in IL Editor 5 3 Footer custom 2 25 Format Reference Table 8 6 Format switches custom header footer Function Address 4 5 Function block parameters completing Function blocks IL editor LD editor 4 5 Function Data Length 4 5 Function properties Function toolbar compact compact teed Functions built in LD editor 4 5 Functions properties 4 9 4 10 G General options setting 1 5 Genius bus configuration Go To 3 16 Go To variable locating varia
290. tings 10 5 10 12 0 12 Serial port IBM AT XT B 5 Serial port and cables cable and connector specifications IBM AT XT serial port multidrop connections RS 232 point to point connections RS 232 RS 485 converter RS 422 interface serial cable as B 4 Serial port Index 7 Index Serial port update device See EZ Program Store Series 90 Micro configuring 7 45 Shared module IDs VersaMax 7 27 7 31 Shortcut Keys hardware confi suration 7 6 VersaPro SNF Auto export cnableT 6 SNF File exporting variables importing variables SNP Timers 10 5_ Sorting variables 6 12 Specifications serial port cables B 3 ST_BOOL 5 10 ST_INTJ 5 10 Starting VersaPro 1 2 Status bar 2 13 Status information Storing folder to PLC Motion Local Logic RIO configuration 7 30 Synchronizing VersaPro with HWC 1 14 1 6 Syntax check Syntax checks performing 3 20 T Target communications status information 10 24 TCP IP ethernet connection Timed interrupt 90 30 block name 3 4 Timing Considerations for EGD 7 37 Toggle reference reference view tables 8 14 Toolbar compact 4 6 expanded 4 7 Toolbars aad zs configuration 7 3 7 8 VersaPro A 8 Transfer utilities read write verify EZ Program Store 10 23 read write verify flash memory 10 22 Transfer Utilities clearing PLC Memory 10 20 loading from the PLC loa
291. tion in the PLC Description The Description field allows you to enter descriptive information about a variable The field is optional and may be left blank Descriptions can be no longer than 64 characters Stored Value Any initial value specified for a variable in the Variable Declaration Table is transferred to the PLC upon program transfer even if the variable is not used in the program Such values are considered an attribute of the variable You can specify as much information per variable as the Reference Table will hold Scope Scope defines the areas where a variable can be used in a folder The possible values for scope are Global and for each block in the folder Local lt block name gt System variables are pre defined for use by the PLC CPU Chapter 6 Working with the Variable Declaration Table 6 3 Retentive The Retentive field specifies whether or not the selected variable retains its value after loss of power The retentive state shown in the VDT initializes the variable when stored It does not show the current retentive state as logic is running VersaPro requires that the retentive state be checked for all memory areas except M Q and T Row validation automatically corrects any incorrect settings for all but these areas Overrides Overrides are tools for program checking and maintenance You can test a program in a PLC that is not connected to I O hardware by using overrides to simulate inputs
292. tions with their 90 70 counterparts Note that the Q output on the EQ INT function is no longer connected to the first GE INT function EQ INT GE INT GT INT eroooot RON IN OH skoon q Room m O H Roood2 THe RoO003 IH Roo004 THe 4 18 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 5 Use the ONDTR function block to simulate the 90 30 only TMR function block For example the following ONDTR and TMR function blocks are roughly equivalent TOON TOO TOO 6 Simulate a 90 30 only END instruction by creating an END label at the end of the block and placing a JUMPN to the label END in place of the END instruction This only works if the block is _MAIN 7 Replace a 90 30 WORD_TO_REAL or REAL_TO_WORD function with a 90 70 UINT_TO_REAL or REAL _TO_UINT 8 Don t make MAIN aC block 9 Use LD instead of IL if at all possible Since Series 90 70 PLCs do not support IL you would need to convert IL logic to LD GFK 1670D Chapter 4 Working in the LD Editor 4 19 Issues in Logic Converted from 90 30 to 90 70 After you have converted a program from 90 30 VersaMax to 90 70 you should look for and correct the following 1 When you replace a 90 30 function such as SHFR_WORD with its 90 70 counterpart that has additional parameters existing arguments may be out of place For example OF ROo00 ROO becomes SHFR WORD 10 E OF E0000 5 H Rood INH
293. tions to the PLCs The configurations for both the Primary and Secondary PLCs are stored in two separate Equipment Folders You will need to store the Primary PLC s configuration using the Primary s Folder and then store the Secondary PLC s configuration using the Secondary s Folder The Store procedure lets you select what portions of the equipment configuration to include in a Store operation Details about the store procedure in general are found elsewhere in the online help Basic Store Procedure This following steps describe the procedure to store the Primary and Secondary configurations to the PLCs If your programmer is already connected to and communicating with the Primary PLC skip down to Step 4 l Connect your serial communications cable from your programmer probably a personal computer to the PLC s programming port In VersaPro PLC menu choose Connect The Connect dialog box will appear Select the Device and Port that you want to use to connect to PLC then click the Connect Button A connection will be made and the Status Bar displays a Connected message Select Store on the PLC Menu The Store Folder to PLC dialog box is displayed Select only Hardware Configuration and motion in the selection window A selected item will have a check mark next to it Clicking the item will toggle its selection check mark between on and off Click the OK button to store your Primary configuration to the Primary PLC To store th
294. to Send RS 232 RS 485 Converter The RS 232 RS 485 Converter IC690ACC900 can be used to convert from RS 232 to RS 422 RS 485 communications The converter has one 15 pin female D type port and one 25 pin female D type port This converter unit can be purchased from GE Fanuc Automation Please contact any GE Fanuc Automation sales office or field service representative GFK 1670D Appendix B Serial Connections B 5 Serial Cable Diagrams This section shows two serial port connections for Series 90 and VersaMax PLCs Cabling may vary depending on the devices and converter used in your application In the point to point configuration only two devices can be connected to the same communication line The communication line can be directly connected using RS 232 50 feet 15 meters maximum or RS 485 4000 feet 1200 meters maximum Modems can be used for longer distances RS 232 Point to Point Connection IC690CBL702 OR EQUIVALENT RS 232 RS 422 RS 422 a44507 RS 232 CONVERTER TWISTED SHIELDED SHIELDED PAIRS IC690ACC900 PAIRS o 0 0 r 0 d 0 0 i 0 COMPATIBLE 0 0 0 o 0 Can 0 0 0 RS 232 0 0 0 0 0 0 SERIES 0 0 0 90PLC PORT oo va oe a o 0 a RS 422 0 0 0 0 0 0 MALE FEMALE W ot er 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 j 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 25 PIN 25 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN 15 PIN MALE FEMALE FEMALE MALE MALE FEMALE PORT PORT Power source for point to point connection 10 feet 3 meters only Converter power sour
295. to the CPU clock or set the CPU date and time e Synchronize CPU to Host Click the Synchronize CPU to Host button e Set CPU Date amp Time Type the month day and year optional in the New Date field and type the time in hours minutes and seconds optional in the New Time field Click the Apply button to accept the changes GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 25 Placing the PLC in Run or Stop Mode You can manually set the PLC for Run or Stop mode In Run mode you can choose to have Outputs enabled or disabled In Stop mode you can choose to enable or disable the I O Scan To Place the PLC in Run Mode 1 Confirm that you are connected to the PLC 2 Click the Run PLC button ies or choose Run from the PLC menu To Place the PLC in Stop Mode 1 Confirm that you are connected to the PLC 2 Click the Stop button E or choose Stop from the PLC menu 3 In the Stop Execution dialog box choose to enable or disable outputs then click the OK button 10 26 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Monitoring Logic Execution VersaPro allows you to view the value or state of an element or operand from the Reference View Table the Variable View Table the Ladder Editor or the Instruction List Editor during logic execution This can provide you with an opportunity to test the execution of logic to trigger an event within an executing folder or to remove an element from logic
296. ts an existing HWC Hardware Configuration Folder hwcfg into the current HWC File Rack System Edit window Import Hardware Imports an IOCFG CFG file and optional CPUCFG CFG file that was produced by Configuration Folder either LM90 or CC90 into a designated new HWC Hardware Folder Import from EGD Tool Imports EGD configuration created by the stand alone EGD Tool The EGD Tool provides a global view of the EGD exchanges allows you to easily keep track of produced consumed exchanges and provides error and consistency checking Restore EGD and Name Restores EGD and Name Resolution configuration from a backup file created during Resolution configuration Load Save Ctrl S Saves an opened document using the same file name Saves an opened document to a specified file name Convert To Converts the current Rack System configuration to a default Rack System configuration of the type selected Series 9030 VersaMax VersaMax Nano Micro Series 90 Micro You can only convert a Rack System configuration to a different type of Rack System If you want to create the same type of Rack configuration as the current one use Save As Print Ctrl P Prints all or portions of the current Rack System Hardware Configuration Print Preview Displays all or portions of the current Rack System Hardware Configuration on the screen as it would appear when printed Print Setup Selects a printer and printer connection A 12 VersaPro P
297. u always answer No to All to ensure that no files are deleted that might be needed by another application Note When you upgrade from previous versions to VersaPro 2 00 your user screen settings and the directory location for program files will be lost You will need to re establish these settings after completing the upgrade Note For procedures to transfer your VersaPro license to another computer refer to Appendix C Note If you are installing on a computer with the Windows NT operating system you must be logged in with administrator privileges If you do not have administrator privileges VersaPro will not install properly Contact your company IS IT department for assistance if this is the case Starting VersaPro Software 1 2 The VersaPro application is installed in the GE Fanuc Software Program group The application can be started by selecting Start gt Programs gt GE Fanuc Software gt VersaPro It is also possible to create a shortcut to the VersaPro application and place the shortcut on the desktop or to click on a file created by VersaPro the file in the VersaPro folder with a fld extension and start the application in the context of the selected folder VersaPro may also be started using CTRL ALT V VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Multiple Instances of VersaPro e Four VersaPro sessions or instances of VersaPro are supported e If you are using a serial connect
298. uch as Word or Excel documents hardware configuration or any folder subdirectories When you save a folder and the Auto Backup option is enabled in the Options dialog box The number of folder backup files that VersaPro will keep is also configured using the Options dialog By default this option is enabled by default and the last three folder backups are kept For more information see Auto Backup on page 2 19 To manually back up your folder 1 2 18 Select the Folder menu and choose Backup The Backup Folder dialog box will appear In the Source Folder field enter the path and name of the folder that you want to back up or locate it by clicking on the Open Folder button and selecting the folder in the Browse dialog box that appears In the Destination field enter the name of the backup and the location to which you wish to save it or locate the path by clicking on the Open Folder button and selecting the folder in the Browse dialog box that appears Click OK A backup of the folder you select is created and saved under the specified name to the indicated location VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Restoring a Folder from Backup VersaPro allows you to restore backed up files as necessary Compressed backup files are decompressed and fully restored when a restore is performed Perform the following steps to restore a folder from backup 1 Close any open folders 2 Sele
299. um 4664 Group 132 Action A C pem e m l a Fault Selector all Fault Extra Data oo OO 00 00 OO OO OO OD fE tE tE tE TE tE tE tE tf fE tE tE tE it tf tt Byte Raw Data Format r e To list all faults and expanded fault data select the File menu and choose Save or Save As Once you have saved this information you can then use a text editor to view or print the text file created by the Save operation GFK 1670D Chapter 11 Working with Fault Tables 11 3 Sorting Faults Faults are displayed in the order they are logged based on date and time However you can select for faults to be ordered by fault location or grouped by fault description To change the order of display select the View menu choose Sort and select the key field for the sorted display For the PLC Fault Table the sorting choices are as follows e Location e Description e Date Time e For the I O Fault Table the sorting choices are as follows e Location e Circuit Number e Reference Address e Category e Type e Date Time Note To restore the list to the original dated order select the View menu and choose Sort Ascending Saving Fault Information You can save fault information to a text file to help you document or troubleshoot a problem When you save to a file both the fault table entry and the fault details are saved to file Perform these steps to save the fault data 1 Select the PLC or I O Fault Table 2 Sel
300. umber of undoable actions VersaPro allows you to configure the number of undo redo operations available during editing sessions The default number is 10 The valid range is 1 to 100 Setting Auto Backup options If Auto Backup is enabled VersaPro automatically creates a backup copy flb of a folder when it 1s being saved You can specify the number of backup files from 1 to 100 that will be kept default is 3 Auto Backup is enabled by default VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Setting Display Options GFK 1670D VersaPro allows you to set text font size and color separately for the IL LD Local Logic and Motion Editors for the VDT and for Variable View Reference View and Local Logic Variable tables Perform these steps to set display options ip The Options dialog box appears Select the Display tab General Display Ladder Communications MPYLL Editors Category Colors LO Background LLT Comments Local Logic Constants Motion Program Labels Instructions Inputs Eont MS Serif Outputs Sze E a Sample Aabb Yycz comet He From the Category list select the editor or table whose display options you wish to The Colors list displays the items you can configure for the selected editor or table Certain combinations of colors and backgrounds can be difficult to read Chapter I Introduction Choose Options from the Tool
301. umn Type a reference address in one of the following formats IOOO01 11 3 Press Enter or select another field The reference and corresponding columns are displayed in the RVT Valid RVT Entries e Word Memory areas R AI AQ begin with the address you enter e The same reference address may be entered and displayed more than once e Ifa value is too large to display in the current cell width HFF s appear until you increase the column width so that the entire value can be displayed e Valid offsets range from 0 99999 If an entered offset exceeds the maximum an error message appears informing you of the maximum value and the fact that it has been exceeded Monitoring within an RVT can not take place until all offsets are determined to be within the limits of the PLC e Ifan offset is valid but data is not available a O displays If the offset is not valid the cell remains blank Adding a Range to a Reference View Table 1 Open an RVT by double clicking on it in the Folder Browser 2 Ona blank line select the Reference Address column 3 Enter the first address in the range a comma and then the last address in the range Multiple reference addresses must be separated by commas Entering an invalid multiple range Reference Address results in an error e The same reference address range may be entered and displayed more than once e Valid offsets range from 0 99999 If an entered offset exceeds the maximum an
302. untered traveling left from the selected module Normal Range Power Consumption percentage bars representing less than 75 consumption are displayed in the Power Normal color default is green Warning Range Power Consumption percentage bars representing more than 75 to 100 consumption are displayed in the Power Warning color default is yellow Exceeded Range Power Consumption percentage bars representing greater than 100 consumption are displayed in the Power Error color default is red Note that if consumption is exceeded the label at the bottom of the graph displays the actual amount used but the percentage bar does not show greater than 100 Note To change the normal warning and error colors in the Power View display choose Options from the Tools menu GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 51 Converting Rack Systems The default hardware configuration is VersaMax If this is not the type you plan to work with the type can be changed using the following steps 1 2 3 From HWC select the File Menu and choose Convert To Select the PLC type that is available in the list A message box will appear warning that I O modules will not be carried over to the new rack system Please note that this operation cannot be undone To continue with the conversion click Yes To abort the conversion and keep the existing hardware configuration click No Note To change the default hardware configuration
303. vailable options appear in gray text 4 Click the desired option ds Cut Copy Paste 2 Check Selected Blockis Ctrl F 7 E Check All ta Store Insert Block Insert Object New Block New Reference View Table New Variable View Table Open View Online Crass Reference gt Delete Find In Blocks Froperties Allow docking Hide GFK 1670D Chapter 2 Working With Folders 2 15 Working with Windows in the VersaPro Workspace 2 16 All windows in the VersaPro workspace can be moved by dragging and dropping These windows can also be resized To move a window click its title bar or top border if it doesn t have a title bar and drag it To resize a window click its edge or corner and drag The Folder Browser Information Window Variable Declaration Table and Local Logic Variable Table used in Motion programs can be docked fixed or undocked floating To select or deselect docking click the secondary mouse button in the window and choose Allow Docking from the context sensitive menu Note If you click in an undocked window you will not be able to select items from the main menus or other windows in VersaPro until the window is docked again These windows can be docked and undocked by selecting Allow Docking from the CSM You should undock these windows only temporarily in order to move them to a new docked location Hiding a window makes it disappear temporarily It does not c
304. value and Type are also specified for each function and function block A Yes in the ENO column indicates that the function or function block sets the ENO Enable Output variable The table also indicates whether the function or function block requires the accumulator to be initialized by placing an LD Bool instruction in front of the function block Function or Function Block Requires Resulting Accumulator LD Boolean Value and Type Instruction Timers and Counters Function Blocks ONDTR_TENTHS ONDTR_HUNDS ONDTR_THOUS TMR_TENTHS TMR_HUNDS TMR_THOUS OFDT_TENTHS OFDT_HUNDS OFDT_THOUS UPCTR DNCTR Standard Math Functions ADD_INT Output Parameter Q Integer ADD_DINT Output Parameter Q Double Integer ADD_REAL Output Parameter Q Real SUB_INT Output Parameter Q Integer SUB_DINT Output Parameter Q Double Integer SUB_REAL Output Parameter Q Real MUL_INT Output Parameter Q Integer MUL_DINT Output Parameter Q Double Integer MUL_REAL Output Parameter Q Real DIV_INT Output Parameter Q Integer DIV_DINT Output Parameter Q Double Integer DIV_REAL Output Parameter Q Real ADD_INT Output Parameter Q Integer ADD_DINT Output Parameter Q Double Integer ADD_REAL Output Parameter Q Real MOD_INT Yes Output Parameter Q Integer MOD_DINT Yes Output Parameter Q Double Integer SQRT_INT Yes Ld Output Parameter Q Integer GFK 1670D Chapter 5 Working in the Instruction List Editor 5 13 ENO Requires Resulting Accumulator
305. values that have been changed since the start of the editing session are shown in bold Undoing Changes e To reset a single parameter to the Start of Edit Session value or to Factory Original default setting right click on the parameter and choose Reset Parameter from the context sensitive menu e To reset all the parameters on a tab right click anywhere in the tab and choose Reset Tab from the context sensitive menu e To Undo changes choose Undo from the Edit menu or click the Undo button on the Editor toolbar The Editor supports from 1 to 32 levels of Undo Redo default is 10 You can set the levels of Undo Redo by choosing Options from the Tools menu Note You cannot Undo changes that result from changing a Mode Setter parameter Error Notification GFK 1670D Erroneous values are displayed in the Error Color red by default and an explanatory ToolTip is provided for the error To see the ToolTip for an erroneous setting in the Parameter Editor hover the mouse cursor over the parameter cell To change error notification colors 1 Select Options from the Tools menu 2 In the Options dialog box choose the General tab Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 5 In the Colors list choose the condition for which you want to set the color Click the Choose button The Windows color selection dialog box will open Select a color click OK in the color selection dialog box then click OK in the Options dialog box
306. variable entry or entries Select at least one cell within each row that you wish to cut Position the mouse over the selected variable or cell Press and hold the Ctrl key Press and hold down the primary mouse button Move the variable or cell to the appropriate area VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D 7 A graphical representation of the selected area is displayed to indicate a selection is being dragged This representation changes dynamically when you drag between two instances of the VVT which have different cell dimensions 8 To drop the selection release the mouse button If it is valid in the new location the selected variable or cell 1s copied from the original position and placed in the new position If it is not valid the drag and drop operation is cancelled Details on Dragging and Dropping in a VVT e Selections may be dropped on any part of a row e Ifa section is dropped on the last row of the VVT that would go beyond the last row of the table new rows are created to accommodate the drop e Variables can be entered more than once within a VVT e Ifa selection is dropped that would go beyond the last row of the VVT new rows are created to accommodate the drop e When a selection is dropped it overwrites the existing cells e VersaPro does not allow dragging and dropping a discontinuous set of cells e When you drop to a second instance of a VVT a new variable is created i
307. w or rung in language editors IL or LD or to locate and go to the location of a specific variable e Find This action allows you to locate variables reference addresses call references Jump labels MCR labels or instructions in block logic e Edit Variable Selecting this command from the IL or LD editor will take you to the variable definition in the Variable Declaration Table Locating and going to a Rung Row or Variable You can use the Go To feature to change focus to a specific Rung LD Editor Row IL Editor or Variable Variable Declaration Table Follow the steps below to use the Go To feature 1 Place the cursor in the LD Editor IL Editor or Variable Declaration Table 2 Select the Edit menu and choose Go To LD or IL Editor or choose Go To Variable Variable Declaration Table The Go To dialog box will appear GoTo Ea Go to Variable gt Go to row number Enter the variable name il Cancel Cancel Help A Help Zo eal a Bs 3 Complete the dialog box as described for the LD Editor IL Editor or Variable Declaration Table After entering the rung row or name click OK LD Editor Type the number of the rung you want to go to IL Editor Type the number of the row you want to go to Variable Declaration Table Type the name of the variable you want to go to 3 16 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Locating Names Instructions Addre
308. w to read write verify the EZ Program Store device VersaMax CPUs e How to view PLC status information e How to place the PLC in Run or Stop mode e Monitoring logic execution GFK 1670D 10 1 CCU Overview Many communication issues can be resolved by properly setting the communications timing parameters which may have been altered from previous programmer sessions on the same PC The CCU allows you to view and change your settings for the PLCs that you connect to over Ethernet serial line or modem Note The Associated Device feature provided by the CCU cannot be used with VersaPro Opening the CCU To open the CCU from VersaPro or Hardware Configuration HWC select Tools Communications Setup To open the CCU from a command line within an MS DOS box or from Start gt Run type GEFCCU32 EXE This application is installed in the Windows root directory usually C Windows for Windows 95 or Windows 98 and C WinNT for Windows NT Since this location is always in your path you do not need to specify the path when invoking the CCU Password If a password has been defined for the CCU you will be presented with a dialog box asking for a password If you only want to look at your communications parameters not make changes click the View Only button to view the parameters in Read Only mode To change the password click the Change Password button on the Password dialog box To define or change a password for the CCU go to t
309. ware 7 33 Configuring the Ethernet Interface Adapter Name CPU364 If the CPU364 will be used in EGD exchanges you must specify an Adapter Name When you define an EGD exchange you will use the Adapter Name to specify which network adapter will produce the exchange To specify the adapter name for a CPU364 Ethernet Interface e From Hardware Configuration confirm that the CPU364 has been configured Also confirm that the IP address for the Ethernet module is correct If so double click the CPU slot e The Parameter Editor will appear Choose the Ethernet tab e Click the Values field beside Adapter Name and type a name for the adapter When finished click the OK button Setting Aliases for Remote Ethernet Interfaces CPU364 and CMM742 If a remote Ethernet controller will be used in EGD exchanges you must associate an alias with the card s IP address When you define an EGD exchange you will use this alias to specify which network adapter will produce the exchange To specify an alias for a remote Ethernet Interface e In Hardware Configuration go to the Edit menu choose Rack Operations and select Name Resolution and Routing or click the right mouse button and choose Name Resolution Routing from the pop up menu e Inthe Name Resolution and Routing Table dialog box click the Aliases tab e Click the Add Entry button e In the Alias field type the name you want to use to refer to the remote Ethernet controller
310. ware User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Chapter 3 GFK 1670D Working With Blocks The Series 90 70 Series 90 30 and VersaMax PLCs support multiple blocks per folder the total number of blocks vary depending on the PLC configured All PLCs require that one of the blocks is _MAIN This block is automatically created when you create a new folder This chapter describes how to work with blocks using VersaPro Programming Software Chapter Contents How to create and open blocks and objects How to manage blocks and related components in the folder browser How to work with variables associated with folder components How to convert blocks between IL and LD 3 1 Creating Inserting and Opening Blocks VersaPro allows you to use multiple blocks per folder one of which must always be a __MAIN block A name is always required in order for a block to be created Note that each PLC model has a different limit for the number of blocks excluding _MAIN that can be created in a folder The Series 90 Micro supports only a _MAIN block More than one block can be open at once Once a block has been created it can be called from within the _MAIN or any other block You can also call a block that does not yet exist but that you intend to create When you compile a syntax error appears reminding you that the new block has not been defined The following types of blocks can be created in VersaPro Block Type Supported by Ladder
311. ws open for RTU The following table lists maximum number of open windows that can be monitored for each PLC model 10 28 VersaPro Programming Software User s Guide November 2004 GFK 1670D Maximum Number of Windows and Applications Supported 2 VersaMax Micro 4 8 Ethernet Series 90 30 Series 90 70 16 serial 8 Ethernet Series 90 Micro 16 N A Example VersaPro and the Fault Table count as two applications Example VersaPro and the Fault Table count as two applications Searching for Overrides When the VersaPro folder is connected to a PLC you can search the PLC logic for variables that have overrides To use this feature select Search for Overrides from the PLC menu Variables that are overridden will be listed in the Information Window GFK 1670D Chapter 10 Communicating with the PLC 10 29 Chapter Il GFK 1670D Working with Fault Tables The PLC and I O Fault Tables display fault information logged by the CPU or modules in the PLC This information is used to determine if there are problems with the PLC hardware or software running in the PLC CPU You can view sort print and clear faults with the Fault system Note The Fault Table system is a separate application from VersaPro with its own menu bar and toolbar The Fault Table when minimized is reduced to a button on the Windows taskbar and does not appear in the Equipment Workbench window Chapter Contents How to view PLC and I O F
312. y and paste a single parameter value between module views The Edit Window can be displayed in Tabbed mode default or Spreadsheet Mode allows all parameter groups to be displayed and edited in a single scrollable view To change the display select Parameter Edit from the View menu The Title Bar of the window uniquely identifies the associated module with the rack system name the module rack slot address and the module catalog number GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 3 Note Some of the more complex modules such as the Motion modules contain key parameters known as Mode Setters All parameters including Mode Setters that affect other parameters are listed in italics To obtain an explanation of parameter relationships for these parameters press F1 in the Editor window and select the parameter name from the Help index Or right click the parameter and select What s This from the CSM Mode Setter Em Changes the set of farerei Ueno parameters available for Settings Scan Port 1 Y editing Resets the Tool Tip wer Consumption Displays valid choices parameters it affects v for selected parameter p AE alues DESE AORE Constant Sweep Timer moec 100 CPL 20K UserP ss Status Bar Displays information about module being configured Editing Tips Valid values for each parameter are displayed in a tool tip that appears when you hover the mouse cursor over the pa
313. ystem containing Main and Rack 1 tabs will be displayed If there is an isolated receiver in the first expansion rack it is replaced with the default non isolated receiver Related Parameters for Multiple Remote Rack Systems On the Settings tab for CPU parameters the Expansion Bus Speed parameter appears if Multiple Remote Rack is selected and if there is an isolated receiver present in any one of the expansion racks Values are Extended Distance default and Normal For Normal distance the maximum allowable cable length is 15m 250ft and the baud rate may vary between 250KHz 1MHz 3MHz or SMHz For Extended Distance the maximum allowable distance is 250m 820ft and baud rate is fixed at 250KHz Each expansion rack has one Power Supply and Non Isolated Receiver Unit The isolated receiver can be replaced with the non isolated receiver and vice versa see Expansion Rack Operations Note When a module is auto configured and the Expansion Bus Speed setting changes as a result an Expansion bus speed change fault will be generated You should correct the Expansion Bus Speed setting GFK 1670D Chapter 7 Configuring PLC Hardware 7 25 Expansion Rack Operations 7 26 The catalog ID and description for the Power Supply And Receiver Integrated unit is shown on the status bar When you select the integrated unit the receiver information is shown as a part of the status bar Selecting an Expansion Receiver By default t

VersaPro Programming Software User`s Guide, GFK

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents